WO2005046712A1 - Hepatitis c virus inhibitors - Google Patents

Hepatitis c virus inhibitors Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2005046712A1
WO2005046712A1 PCT/US2004/038165 US2004038165W WO2005046712A1 WO 2005046712 A1 WO2005046712 A1 WO 2005046712A1 US 2004038165 W US2004038165 W US 2004038165W WO 2005046712 A1 WO2005046712 A1 WO 2005046712A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
alkyl
hcv
alkoxy
optionally substituted
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2004/038165
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Paul Michael Scola
Fiona Mcphee
Nicholas A. Meanwell
Piyasena Hewawasam
Jeffrey Allen Campbell
Original Assignee
Bristol-Myers Squibb Company
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Bristol-Myers Squibb Company filed Critical Bristol-Myers Squibb Company
Priority to EP04811049A priority Critical patent/EP1687018B1/en
Priority to JP2006539980A priority patent/JP4675331B2/en
Priority to ES04811049T priority patent/ES2380934T3/en
Priority to AT04811049T priority patent/ATE542826T1/en
Publication of WO2005046712A1 publication Critical patent/WO2005046712A1/en
Priority to IS8448A priority patent/IS8448A/en
Priority to NO20062267A priority patent/NO20062267L/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/08—Tripeptides
    • C07K5/0802—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/0804—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/0808—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing 2 to 4 carbon atoms, e.g. Val, Ile, Leu
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/08—Tripeptides
    • C07K5/0802—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides

Definitions

  • the present invention is generally directed to antiviral compounds, and more specifically directed to compounds which inhibit the functioning of the NS3 protease (also referred to herein as "serine protease") encoded by Hepatitis C virus (HCV), compositions comprising such compounds and methods for inhibiting the functioning of the NS 3 protease .
  • NS3 protease also referred to herein as "serine protease”
  • HCV Hepatitis C virus
  • HCV is a major human pathogen, infecting an estimated 170 million persons worldwide - roughly five times the number infected by human immunodeficiency virus type 1. A substantial fraction of these HCV infected individuals develop serious progressive liver disease, including cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma. (Lauer, G. M.; Walker, B. D. N. Engl. J. Med. (2001), 345, 41-52).
  • HCV is a positive-stranded RNA virus. Based on a comparison of the deduced amino acid sequence and the extensive similarity in the 5' untranslated region, HCV has been classified as a separate genus in the Flaviviridae family. All members of the Flaviviridae family have enveloped virions that contain a positive stranded RNA genome encoding all known virus-specific proteins via translation of a single, uninterrupted, open reading frame.
  • the single strand HCV RNA genome is approximately 9500 nucleotides in length and has a single open reading frame (ORF) encoding a single large polyprotein of about 3000 amino acids. In infected cells, this polyprotein is cleaved at multiple sites by cellular and viral proteases to produce the structural and non- structural (NS) proteins. In the case of HCV, the generation of mature non-structural proteins (NS2, NS3, NS4A, NS4B, JNS5A, and NS5B) is effected by two viral proteases.
  • ORF open reading frame
  • the first one is believed to cleave at the NS2-NS3 junction; the second one is a serine protease contained within the N-terminal region of NS3 and mediates all the subsequent cleavages downstream of NS3, both in cis, at the NS3-NS4A cleavage site, and in trans, for the remaining NS4A- NS4B, NS4B-NS5A, NS5A-NS5B sites.
  • the NS4A protein appears to serve multiple functions, acting as a cofactor for the NS3 protease and possibly assisting in the membrane localization of NS3 and other viral replicase components.
  • NS3 protein The complex formation of the NS3 protein with NS4A seems necessary to the processing events, enhancing the proteolytic efficiency at all of the sites.
  • the NS3 protein also exhibits nucleoside triphosphatase and RNA helicase activities.
  • NS5B is a RNA-dependent RNA polymerase that is involved in the replication of HCV.
  • the present invention relates to compounds having the formula
  • Ri and R 2 are each independently -s alkyl, C 3- cycloalkyl, C 4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, C 6-10 aryl, C -14 alkylaryl, C 9-14 cycloalkylaryl, C 7-14 alkoxyaryl, C 9-14 cycloalkoxyaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C -14 alkylheteroaryl; or Ri and R 2 , together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 4-8 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
  • R 3 is H or C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl or C 3-7 cycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with halogen;
  • R 4 is C 1-8 alkyl optionally substituted with halo, cyano, amino, C 1-6 dialkylamino, C 6-10 aryl, C 7-14 alkylaryl, C 1-6 alkoxy, carboxy, hydroxy, aryloxy, C -1 alkylaryloxy, C 2-6 alkylester or C 8-15 alkylarylester; C 3-12 alkenyl; C 3- cycloalkyl or C 4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, wherein the cycloalkyl or alkylcycloalkyl are optionally substituted with hydroxy, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl or C 1-6 alkoxy; or R 3 together with the carbon atom to which it is attached forms a C 3-7 cycloalkyl group optionally substituted with C 2-6 alkenyl; (f) Y is H, phenyl substituted with nitro, pyridyl substituted with nitro, or C ⁇ - 5 alkyl optionally substituted with
  • R 5 is (i) Ci-io alkyl optionally substituted with phenyl, carboxyl, C 1-6 alkanoyl, 1-3 halogen, hydroxy, -OC(O)C ⁇ -6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, amino optionally substituted with C 1-6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amido; (ii) C 3-7 cycloalkyl, C 3 .
  • R a is C 1-6 alkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, C 3-7 cycloalkoxy, halo- - ⁇ alkyl, CF 3 , mono-or di- halo-C 1-6 alkoxy, cyano, halo, thioalkyl, hydroxy, alkanoyl, NO 2 , SH, , amino, C 1-6 alkylamino, di (C ⁇ - 6 ) alkylamino, di ( - ⁇ ) alkylamide, carboxyl, (C ⁇ ) carboxyester, C 1-6 alkylsulfone, C ⁇ - 6 alkylsulfonamide, di (Ci- 6 ) alkyl(alkoxy)amine, C - 10 aryl, C 7- j 4 alkylaryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
  • the present invention also provides compositions comprising the compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates or prodrugs thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the present invention provides pharmaceutical compositions useful for inhibiting HCV NS3 comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the present invention further provides methods for treating patients infected with HCV, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof. Additionally, the present invention provides methods of inhibiting HCV NS3 protease by contacting the NS3 protease with a compound of the present invention.
  • the present invention provides peptide compounds that can inhibit the functioning of the NS3 protease, e.g., in combination with the NS4A protease.
  • the present invention makes it possible to administer combination therapy to a patient whereby a compound in accordance with the present invention, which is effective to inhibit the HCV NS3 protease, can be administered with another compound having anti-HCV activity, e.g., a compound which is effective to inhibit the function of a target selected from the group consisting of HCV metalloprotease, HCV serine protease, HCV polymerase, HCV helicase, HCV NS4B protein, HCV entry, HCV assembly, HCV egress, HCV NS5A protein, IMPDH and a nucleoside analog for the treatment of an HCV infection.
  • a target selected from the group consisting of HCV metalloprotease, HCV serine protease, HCV polymerase, HCV helicase, HCV NS4B protein, HCV entry, HCV assembly, HCV egress, HCV NS5A protein, IMPDH and a nucleoside analog for the treatment of an HCV infection.
  • d and 1 or (+) and (-) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with (-) or 1 meaning that the compound is levorotatory and (+) or d, meaning the compound, is dextrorotatory.
  • these compounds called stereoisomers, are identical except that they are mirror images of one another.
  • a specific stereoisomer of a mirror image pair may also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture.
  • (R) or (S) it is to designate the absolute configuration of a substituent in context to the whole compound and not in context to the substituent alone.
  • racemic mixture and “racemate” refer to an equimolar mixture of two enantiomeric species, devoid of optical activity.
  • chiral refers to molecules which have the property of non-superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term “achiral” refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner.
  • stereoisomers refers to compounds which have identical chemical composition, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space.
  • diastereorner refers to a stereoisomer which is not an enantiomer, e.g., a stereoisomer with two or more centers of chirality and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another.
  • Diastereomers have different physical properties, e.g. melting points, boiling points, spectral properties, and reactivities. Mixtures of diastereomers may separate under high resolution analytical procedures such as electrophoresis and chromatography.
  • enantiomers refers to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non-superimposable mirror images of one another.
  • salts are intended to include nontoxic salts synthesized from a compound which contains a basic or acidic moiety by conventional chemical methods. Generally, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, nonaqueous media like ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile are preferred. Lists of suitable salts are found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, PA, 1990, p. 1445. The compounds of the present invention are useful in the form of the free base or acid or in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. All forms are within the scope of the invention.
  • terapéuticaally effective amount means the total amount of each active component that is sufficient to show a meaningful patient benefit, e.g., a sustained reduction in viral load.
  • a meaningful patient benefit e.g., a sustained reduction in viral load.
  • the term refers to that ingredient alone.
  • the term refers to combined amounts of the active ingredients that result in the therapeutic effect, whether administered in combination, serially or simultaneously.
  • derivative means a chemically modified compound wherein the modification is considered routine by the ordinary skilled chemist, such as an ester or an amide of an acid, protecting groups, such as a benzyl group for an alcohol or thiol, and tert-butoxycarbonyl group for an amine.
  • solvate means a physical association of a compound of this invention with one or more solvent molecules, whether organic or inorganic. This physical association includes hydrogen bonding. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid.
  • solvent encompasses both solution-phase and isolable solvates. Exemplary solvates include hydrates, ethanolates, methanolates, isopropanolates and the like.
  • prodrug means derivatives of the compounds of the invention which have chemically or metabolically cleavable groups and become, by solvolysis or under physiological conditions, the compounds of the invention which are pharmaceutically active in vivo.
  • a prodrug of a compound may be formed in a conventional manner with a functional group of the compounds such as with an amino, hydroxy or carboxy group when present.
  • the prodrug derivative form often offers advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility, or delayed release in a mammalian organism (see, Bundgard, H., Design of Prodrugs, pp. 7-9, 21-24, Elsevier, Amsterdam 1985).
  • Prodrugs include acid derivatives well known to practitioners of the art, such as, for example, esters prepared by reaction of the parent acidic compound with a suitable alcohol, or amides prepared by reaction of the parent acid compound with a suitable amine.
  • patient includes both human and other mammals.
  • composition means a composition comprising a compound of the invention in combination with at least one additional pharmaceutical carrier, i.e., adjuvant, excipient or vehicle, such as diluents, preserving agents, fillers, flow regulating agents, disintegrating agents, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, suspending agents, sweetening agents, flavoring agents, perfuming agents, antibacterial agents, antifungal agents, lubricating agents and dispensing agents, depending on the nature of the mode of administration and dosage forms.
  • additional pharmaceutical carrier i.e., adjuvant, excipient or vehicle, such as diluents, preserving agents, fillers, flow regulating agents, disintegrating agents, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, suspending agents, sweetening agents, flavoring agents, perfuming agents, antibacterial agents, antifungal agents, lubricating agents and dispensing agents, depending on the nature of the mode of administration and dosage forms.
  • additional pharmaceutical carrier i.e., adjuvant, excipient
  • phrases "pharmaceutically acceptable” is employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of patients without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication commensurate with a reasonable risk/benefit ratio.
  • treating refers to: (i) preventing a disease, disorder or condition from occurring in a patient which may be predisposed to the disease, disorder and/or condition but has not yet been diagnosed as having it; (ii) inhibiting the disease, disorder or condition, i.e., arresting its development; and (iii) relieving the disease, disorder or condition, i.e., causing regression of the disease, disorder and/or condition.
  • substituted includes substitution at from one to the maximum number of possible binding sites on the core, e.p., organic radical, to which the subsitutent is bonded, e.g., mono-, di-, tri- or tetra- substituted, unless otherwise specifically stated.
  • organic radicals e.g., hydrocarbons and substituted hydrocarbons
  • groups e.g., alkylalkoxyamine or arylalkyl
  • groups include all possible stable configurations, unless otherwise specifically stated. Certain radicals and combinations are defined below for purposes of illustration.
  • halo as used herein means a halogen substituent selected from bromo, chloro, fluoro or iodo.
  • haloalkyl means an alkyl group that in substituted with one or more halo substituents.
  • alkyl as used herein means acyclic, straight or branched chain alkyl substituents having the specified number of carbon atoms and includes, for example, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, tert-butyl, hexyl, 1-methylethyl, 1- methylpropyl, 2-methypropyl, 1,1-dimethylethyl.
  • C 1-6 alkyl refers to an alkyl group having from one to six carbon atoms.
  • the term “lower alkyl” means an alkyl group having from one to six, preferably from one to four carbon atoms.
  • alkylester means an alkyl group additionally containing on ester group. Generally, a stated carbon number range, e.g., C 2-6 alkylester, includes all of the carbon atoms in the radical.
  • alkenyl as used herein means an alkyl radical containing at least one double bond, e.g., ethenyl (vinyl) and alkyl.
  • alkoxy as used herein means an alkyl group with the indicated number of carbon atoms attached to an oxygen atom. Alkoxy includes, for example, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, 1-methylethoxy, butoxy and 1,1-dimethylethoxy. The latter radical is referred to in the art as tert-butoxy.
  • alkoxycarbonyl means an alkoxy group additionally containing a carbonyl group.
  • cycloalkyl as used herein means a cycloalkyl substituent containing the indicated number of carbon atoms and includes, for example, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl and spiro cyclic groups such as spirocyclopropyl as spirocyclobutyl.
  • cycloalkoxy as used herein means a cycloalkyl group linked to an oxygen atom, such as, for example, cyclobutyloxy or cyclopropyloxy.
  • alkylcycloalkyl means a cycloalkyl group linked to an alkyl group.
  • the stated carbon number range includes the total number of carbons in the radical, unless otherwise specifically stated.
  • This a C 4-10 alkylcycloalkyl may contain from 1-7 carbon atoms in the alkyl group and from 3-9 carbon atoms in the ring, e.g., cyclopropylmethyl or cyclohexylethyl.
  • aryl as used herein means an aromatic moiety containing the indicated number of carbon atoms, such as, but not limited to phenyl, indanyl or naphthyl.
  • C 6-10 aryl refers to an aromatic moiety having from six to ten carbon atoms which may be in the form of a monocyclic or bicyclic structure.
  • haloaryl refers to an aryl mono, di or tri substituted with one or more halogen atoms.
  • alkylaryl arylalkyl
  • aralalkyl mean an aryl group substituted with one or more alkyl groups. Unless the carbon range of each group is specified, the stated range applies to the entire substituent.
  • a C 7-1 alkylaryl group many have from 1-8 carbon atoms in the alkyl group for a monocyclic aromatic and from 1-4 carbon atoms in the alkyl group for a fused aromatic.
  • the attachment of the group to bonding site on the molecule can be either at the aryl group or the alkyl group.
  • aryl radicals include those substituted with typical substituents known to those skilled in the art, e.g., halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, carbonyl, nitro, sulfo, amino, cyano, dialkylamino haloalkyl, CF 3 , haloalkoxy, thioalkyl, alkanoyl, SH, alkylamino, alkylamide, dialkylamide, carboxyester, alkylsulfone, alkylsulfonamide and alkyl(alkoxy)amine.
  • alkylaryl groups include benzyl, butylphenyl and 1 -naphthylmethyl.
  • alkanoyl as used herein means straight or branched 1-oxoalkyl radicals containing the indicated number of carbon atoms and includes, for example, formyl, acetyl, 1-oxopropyl (propionyl), 2-methyl-l-oxopropyl, 1-oxohexyl and the like.
  • alkylamide as used herein means an amide mono-substituted with an alkyl, such as
  • heterocycle also referred to as "Het”, as used herein means 7-12 membered bicyclic heterocycles and 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycles.
  • Preferred bicyclic heterocycles are 7-12 membered fused bicyclic ring systems (both rings share an adjacent pair of atoms) containing from one to four heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, wherein both rings of the heterocycle are fully unsaturated.
  • the nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms atoms may be optionally oxidized.
  • the bicyclic heterocycle may contain the heteroatoms in one or both rings.
  • the heterocycles include those substituted with typical substituents known to those skilled in the art.
  • the bicyclic heterocycle may also contain substituents on any of the ring carbon atoms, e.g., one to three substituents.
  • substituents include Ci -6 alkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, C 3-7 cycloalkoxy, halo-Ci- ⁇ alkyl, CF 3 , mono-or di- halo-C 1-6 alkoxy, cyano, halo, thioalkyl, hydroxy, alkanoyl, NO 2 , SH, , amino, C 1-6 alkylamino, di (Ci- 6 ) alkylamino, di (Ct- 6 ) alkylamide, carboxyl, (Ci- 6 ) carboxyester, C 1-6 alkylsulfone, C 1-6 alkylsulfonamide, C 1-6 alkylsulfoxide, di (C ⁇ - 6 ) alkyl(alkoxy)amine, C 6-10 aryl, C 7-14 alkylaryl, and a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
  • bicyclic heterocycle When two substituents are attached to vicinal carbon atoms of the bicyclic heterocycle, they can join to form a ring, e.g., a five, six or seven membered ring system containing up to two heteroatoms selecting from oxygen and nitrogen.
  • the bicyclic heterocycle may be attached to the molecule, e.g. Ri in formula I, at any atom in the ring and preferably carbon.
  • bicyclic heterocycles include, but are not limited to, the following ring systems:
  • Preferred monocyclic heterocycles are 5-7 membered saturated, partially saturated or fully unsaturated ring system (this latter subset also herein referred to as unsaturated heteroaromatic) containing in the ring from one to four heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, wherein the sulfur and nitrogen heteroatoms may be optionally oxidized.
  • unsaturated heteroaromatic a specific heterocycle is specified, e.g., a C 1-6 alkoxy substituted 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle, or the heterocycle is stated to be unsubstituted
  • the heterocycles include those substituted with typical substituents known to those skilled in the art.
  • the monocyclic heterocycle may also contain substituents on any of the ring atoms, e.g., one to three substituents.
  • suitable substituents include C 1-6 alkyl, C 3- cycloalkyl, C ⁇ _ 6 alkoxy, C 3-7 cycloalkoxy, halo- - ⁇ alkyl, CF 3 , mono-or di- halo-C ⁇ -6 alkoxy, cyano, halo, thioalkyl, hydroxy, alkanoyl, NO , SH, amino, C 1-6 alkylamino, di (Ci- 6 ) alkylamino, di (C ⁇ .
  • the monocyclic heterocycle may be attached to the molecule, e.g. Ri in formula I, at any atom in the ring.
  • monocyclic heterocycles include, but are not limited to, the following (and their tautomers):
  • heterocycles used in the compounds of the present invention should be stable.
  • stable compounds are those which can be synthesized, isolated and formulated using techniques known the those skilled in the art without degradation of the compound.
  • substituted with reference to an amino acid or amino acid derivative means a radical derived from the corresponding -amino acid.
  • substituents methyl, iso-propyl, and phenyl represent the amino acids alanine, valine, and phenyl glycine, respectively.
  • PI', PI, P2, P3 and P4" map the relative positions of the amino acid residues of a protease inhibitor binding relative to the binding of the natural peptide cleavage substrate. Cleavage occurs in the natural substrate between PI and PI' where the nonprime positions designate amino acids starting from the C-terminus end of the peptide natural cleavage site extending towards the N-terminus; whereas, the prime positions emanate from the N-terminus end of the cleavage site designation and extend towards the C-terminus.
  • PI' refers to the first position away from the right hand end of the C-terminus of the cleavage site (ie.
  • tert-butylglycine refers to a compound of the formula:
  • residue with reference to an amino acid or amino acid derivative means a radical derived from the corresponding ⁇ -amino acid by eliminating the hydroxyl of the carboxy group and one hydrogen of the ⁇ -amino acid group.
  • the terms Gin, Ala, Gly, He, Arg, Asp, Phe, Ser, Leu, Cys, Asn, Sar and Tyr represent the "residues" of -glutamine, X-alanine, glycine, Z-isoleucine, Z-arginine, L-aspartic acid, £-phenylalanine, L-serine, i-leucine, L-cysteine, Z-asparagine, sarcosine and Z-tyrosine, respectively.
  • side chain with reference to an amino acid or amino acid residue means a group attached to the ⁇ -carbon atom of the ⁇ -amino acid.
  • R-group side chain for glycine is hydrogen, for alanine it is methyl, for valine it is isopropyl.
  • specific R-groups or side chains of the ⁇ -amino acids reference is made to A.L. Lehninger's text on Biochemistry (see chapter 4).
  • Ri and R 2 are each independently C 1-8 alkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkyl C 4- io alkylcycloalkyl, C 1- alkoxy, C 6-10 aryl, C - ⁇ 4 alkylaryl, C 9-1 cycloalkylaryl, C 7-14 alkoxyaryl, C - ⁇ cycloalkoxyaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C -14 alkylheteroaryl; or Ri and R 2 , together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 4-8 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
  • R 3 is H; or C 1-6 alkyl, C -6 alkenyl or C 3-7 cycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with halogen;
  • (e) t is C 1-8 alkyl optionally substituted with halo, cyano, amino, C 1-6 dialkylamino, C 6-10 aryl, C 7-14 alkylaryl, C 1-6 alkoxy, carboxy, hydroxy, aryloxy, C 7-14 alkylaryloxy, C 2-6 alkylester or Cg-is alkylarylester; C 3-12 alkenyl; C 3-7 cycloalkyl or C 4- ⁇ o alkylcycloalkyl, wherein the cycloalkyl or alkylcycloalkyl are optionally substituted with hydroxy, C 1-6 alkyl, C -6 alkenyl or C 1-6 alkoxy; or R 3 together with the carbon atom to which it is attached forms a C 3 . 7 cycloalkyl group optionally substituted with C 2-6 alkenyl;
  • Y is H, phenyl substituted with nitro, pyridyl substituted with nitro, or C 1 . 6 alkyl optionally substituted with cyano, hydroxyl or C 3 _ 7 cycloalkyl; provided that if R 5 or Re is H then Y is H;
  • R 5 is (i) Ci_ ⁇ o alkyl optionally substituted with phenyl, carboxyl, C ⁇ -6 alkanoyl, 1-3 halogen, hydroxy, -OC(O)Ci_ 6 alkyl, C ⁇ alkoxy, amino optionally substituted with C ⁇ -6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amido; (ii) C 3- cycloalkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkoxy, or C 4-1 o alkylcycloalk yl, each optionally substituted with hydroxy, carboxyl, (C ⁇ _ 6 alkoxy)carbonyl, ammo optionally substituted with C 1-6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amido; (iii) C 6-10 aryl or C -16 arylalkyl, each optionally substituted with C 1-6 alkyl, halogen, nitro, hydroxy, amido, (lower alkyl) amido, or amino optionally substitute
  • R is Het, C 6-10 aryl or C 7-14 alkylaryl, each optionally substituted with R a ; and (1) R a is Ci- 6 alkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkyl, C ⁇ -6 alkoxy, C 3-7 cycloalkoxy, halo-Ci- ⁇ alkyl, CF 3 , mono-or di- halo-C 1-6 alkoxy, cyano, halo, thioalkyl, hydroxy, alkanoyl, NO 2 , SH, , amino, C 1-6 alkylamino, di (Ci- 6 ) alkylamino, di (C ⁇ - 6 ) alkylamide, carboxyl, (Ci- 6 ) carboxyester, C 1-6 alkylsulfone, C 1-6 alkylsulfonamide, di (Ci- 6 ) alkyl(alkoxy) mine, C 6 _ 1 0 aryl, C -14 alkylaryl,
  • Ri, and R are each independently C 1-8 alkyl, C 3- cycloalkyl, C 4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, C 6-10 aryl, C 7-14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C 7-14 alkylheteroaryl; or Ri and R 2 , together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 4-8 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
  • Ri and R 2 are each independently C 1-8 alkyl, C 4-1 o alkylcycloalkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, C 6-1 o aryl, C 7-14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C 7-14 alkylheteroaryl, or Ri and R 2 , together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 5-6 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
  • R 3 is C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl or C 3-7 cycloalkyl. More preferably, R 3 is C 2-6 alkenyl.
  • R 4 is C 1-8 alkyl optionally substituted with C 6 aryl, C ⁇ g alkoxy, carboxy, hydroxy, aryloxy, C 7-14 alkylaryloxy, C 2-6 alkylester or C 8-15 alkylarylester; C 3-12 alkenyl; C 3-7 cycloalkyl; or C 4-10 alkylcycloalkyl. More preferably, R is Ci -8 alkyl optionally substituted with C 1-6 alkoxy; or C 3- cycloalkyl. '
  • Y is H.
  • R 5 is (i) C 1-:LO alkyl optionally substituted with phenyl, carboxyl, C 1- alkanoyl, 1-3 halogen, hydroxy, C 1-6 alkoxy; (ii) C 3 . 7 cycloalkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkoxy, or C 4-10 alkylcycloalklyl; or (iii) C 6 - ⁇ 0 aryl or C 7-16 arylalkyl, each optionally substituted with C 1-6 alkyl or halogen. More preferably, R 5 is (i) C 1-10 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 halogen or C 1-6 alkoxy; or (ii) C 3- cycloalkyl or C 4-10 alkylcycloalkyl.
  • R 6 is H or C ⁇ -6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 halogens. More preferably, R 6 is H.
  • X is O or NH.
  • R' is Het; or C 6 - 10 aryl optionally substituted with R a . More preferably, R' is Het. Even more preferably, the heterocycle contains 1 or 2 nitrogen atoms and optionally a sulfur atom or an oxygen atom in the ring. Preferably, the heterocycle is substituted with at least one of C ⁇ -6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, halo, C 6- io aryl, C 7-14 alkylaryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
  • R a is C ⁇ -6 alkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, halo-Cr 6 alkyl, halo, amino, C 6 aryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
  • Ri and R 2 are each independently C 1-8 alkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkyl, C -1 o alkylcycloalkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, C 6-1 o aryl, C 7-14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl, C 7-14 alkylheteroaryl, or Ri and R , together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 4-8 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
  • R 3 is Ci- 6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl or C 3- cycloalkyl
  • R 4 is C 1-8 alkyl optionally substituted with C 6 aryl, C 1-6 alkoxy, carboxy, hydroxy, aryloxy, C 7-14 alkylaryloxy, C 2-6 alkylester, C 8-15 alkylarylester; C 3-12 alkenyl, C 3-7 cycloalkyl, or C 4-1 o alkylcycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is (i) CM O alkyl optionally substituted with phenyl, carboxyl, C ⁇ -6 alkanoyl, 1-3 halogen, hydroxy, C 1-6 alkoxy; (ii) C 3- cycloalkyl, C 3- cycloalkoxy, or C 4-1 o alkylcycloalklyl; or (iii) C - 10 aryl or C 7-1 arylalkyl, each optionally substituted with C 1-6 alkyl or halogen; (h) R 6 is H or C ⁇ -6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 halogens;
  • R' is Het; or C 6-10 aryl optionally substituted with R a ;
  • R a is Ci- 6 alkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, halo-Ci- 6 alkyl, halo, amino, C 6 aryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
  • Ri and R 2 are each independently C 1-8 alkyl, C 4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, Ci- 6 alkoxy, C 6-10 aryl, C 7-14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl, C -14 alkylheteroaryl, or Ri and R 2 , together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 5-6 membered monocyclic heterocycle More preferably, Ri and R 2 are each independently C 1-3 alkyl or C 1-3 alkoxy.
  • R' is a bicyclic heterocycle. More preferably, the heterocycle contains 1 or 2 nitrogen atoms and optionally a sulfur atom or an oxygen atom in the ring. Preferably, the heterocycle is substituted with at least one of C 1-6 alkyl, C ⁇ -6 alkoxy, halo, C 6 aryl, and a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle. Even more preferably, R' is a bicyclic heterocycle containing 1 nitrogen atom and substituted with methoxy and at least one of a C aryl and a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
  • R' is a monocyclic heterocycle.
  • the heterocycle contains 1 or 2 nitrogen atoms and optionally a sulfur atom or an oxygen atom in the ring. More preferably, the heterocycle is substituted with at least one of C 1-6 alkyl, C 1- alkoxy, halo, C -10 aryl, C 7-14 alkylaryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
  • R' is a monoyclic heterocycle containing 1 or 2 nitrogen atoms and substituted with methoxy and at least one of a C 6 aryl and a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
  • Ri and R 2 are each independently C ⁇ -8 alkyl, C 4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, C 6- ⁇ o aryl, C 7 -14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C 7-14 alkylheteroaryl; or Ri and R 2 , together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 5-6 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
  • R 3 is C 2-6 alkenyl
  • (e) i is C1-8 alkyl
  • R 5 is Ci-io alkyl
  • R' is a bicyclic heterocycle optionally substituted with R ;
  • R a is C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, halo, C 6 aryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle
  • Ri and R 2 are each independently C 1-3 alkyl, or C 1-3 alkoxy. More preferably, Ri is methyl. Preferably, R 2 is methyl or methoxy. Preferably, R 3 is vinyl. Preferably, R is t-butyl. Preferably, R 5 is t-butyl. Preferably, R' is quinoline or isoquinoline optionally substituted with R a .
  • Ri is methyl
  • R 2 is methoxy
  • R 3 is vinyl
  • R 4 is t-butyl
  • R 5 is t- butyl
  • R' is isoquinoline substituted with at least one R a .
  • R a is C ⁇ -6 alkoxy. More preferably, R a further includes at least one of C 6 aryl or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
  • the compounds of the present invention can form salts by the addition of a pharmaceutically acceptable acid.
  • the acid addition salts are formed from a compound of Formula I and a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic acid, including but not limited to hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, sulfuric, phosphoric, or organic acid such as * -toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, acetic, benzoic, citric, malonic, fumaric, maleic, oxalic, succinic, sulfamic, or tartaric.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic acid including but not limited to hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, sulfuric, phosphoric, or organic acid such as * -toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, acetic, benzoic, citric, malonic, fumaric, maleic, oxalic, succinic, sulfamic, or tartaric.
  • examples of such pharmaceutically acceptable salts include chloride, bromide, iodide, sulfate, phosphate, methanesulfonate, citrate, acetate, malonate, fumarate, sulfamate, and tartrate.
  • Salts of an amine group may also comprise quaternary ammonium salts in which the amino nitrogen carries a suitable organic group such as an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl or aralkyl moiety.
  • Base addition salts include those derived from inorganic bases which include, for example, alkali metal salts (e.g. sodium and potassium), alkaline earth metal salts (e.g. calcium and magnesium), aluminum salts and ammonium salts.
  • alkali metal salts e.g. sodium and potassium
  • alkaline earth metal salts e.g. calcium and magnesium
  • aluminum salts e.g. aluminum salts and ammonium salts.
  • suitable base addition salts include salts of physiologically acceptable organic bases such as trimethylamine, triethylamine, morpholine, pyridine, piperidine, picoline, dicyclohexylamine, N,N'-dibenzylethylenediamine, 2-hydroxyethylamine, bis-(2-hydroxyethyl)amine, tri-(2-hydroxyethyl)amine, procaine, dibenzylpiperidine, N-benzyl- ⁇ -phenethylamine, dehydroabietylamine, N,N'-bishydroabietylamine, glucamine, N-methylglucamine, collidine, quinine, quinoline, ethylenediamine, omithine, choline, N,N'-benzylphenethylamine, chloroprocaine, diethanolamine, diethylamine, piperazine, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane and tetramethylammonium hydroxide and basic amino acids such
  • salts may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention, and their salts may also exist in the form of solvates with water, for example hydrates, or with organic solvents such as methanol, ethanol or acetonitrile to form, respectively, a methanolate, ethanolate or acetonitrilate.
  • the present invention includes each solvate and nrixtures thereof.
  • compounds of the present invention may exhibit polymorphism.
  • the present invention also encompasses any such polymorphic form.
  • the compounds of the present invention also contain two or more chiral centers.
  • the compounds may include PI cyclopropyl element of formula
  • C 2 each represent an asymmetric carbon atom at positions 1 and 2 of the cyclopropyl ring.
  • the presence of these two asymmetric centers means that the compounds can exist as racemic mixtures of diastereomers, such as the diastereomers wherein R 2 is configured either syn to the amide or syn to the carbonyl as shown below.
  • R 2 is syn to carbonyl
  • R 2 is syn to carbonyl
  • R 2 is syn to amide
  • R 2 is syn to amide
  • the present invention includes both enantiomers and mixtures of enantiomers such as racemic mixtures.
  • the enantiomers may be resolved by methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, by formation of diastereoisomeric salts which may be separated by crystallization, gas-liquid or liquid chromatography, selective reaction of one enantiomer with an enantiomer-specific reagent. It will be appreciated that where the desired enantiomer is converted into another chemical entity by a separation technique, then an additional step is required to form the desired enantiomeric form. Alternatively, specific enantiomers may be synthesized by asymmetric synthesis using optically active reagents, substrates, catalysts or solvents, or by converting one enantiomer into the other by asymmetric transformation.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be in the form of a prodrug.
  • Simple aliphatic or aromatic esters derived from, when present, acidic groups pendent on the compounds of this invention are preferred prodrugs.
  • double ester type prodrugs such as (acyloxy) alkyl esters or (alkoxycarbonyl)oxy)alkyl esters.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention may also exist in different stable conformational forms which may be separable. Torsional asymmetry due to restricted rotation about an asymmetric single bond, for example because of steric hindrance or ring strain, may permit separation of different conformers.
  • the present invention includes each conformational isomer of these compounds and mixtures thereof.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention may exist in zwitterionic form and the present invention includes each zwitterionic form of these compounds and mixtures thereof.
  • the starting materials useful to synthesize the compounds of the present invention are known to those skilled in the art and can be readily manufactured or are commercially available.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be manufactured by methods known to those skilled in the art, see e.g., US Patent No. 6,323,180 and US Patent Application Publication No. 20020111313 Al , published August 15, 2002.
  • the following methods set forth below are provided for illustrative purposes and are not intended to limit the scope of the claimed invention. It will be recognized that it may be preferred or necessary to prepare such a compound in which a functional group is protected using a conventional protecting group then to remove the protecting group to provide a compound of the present invention.
  • the details concerning the use of protecting groups in accordance with the present invention are known to those skilled in the art.
  • the compounds of the present invention may, for example, be synthesized according to a general process as illustrated in Scheme I (wherein CPG is a carboxyl protecting group and APG is an amino protecting group): Scheme I
  • the PI, P2, and P3 can be linked by well known peptide coupling techniques.
  • the PI, P2, and P3 groups may be linked together in any order as long as the final compound corresponds to peptides of the invention.
  • P3 can be linked to P2-P1 ; or PI linked to P3-P2.
  • peptides are elongated by deprotecting the ⁇ -amino group of the N-terminal residue and coupling the unprotected carboxyl group of the next suitably N-protected amino acid through a peptide linkage using the methods described. This deprotection and coupling procedure is repeated until the desired sequence is obtained. This coupling can be performed with the constituent amino acids in stepwise fashion, as depicted in Scheme I.
  • Coupling between two amino acids, an amino acid and a peptide, or two peptide fragments can be carried out using standard coupling procedures such as the azide method, mixed carbonic-carboxylic acid anhydride (isobutyl chloroformate) method, carbodiimide (dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, diisopropylcarbodiimide, or water-soluble carbodiimide) method, active ester (p-nitrophenyl ester, iV-hydroxysuccinic imido ester) method, Woodward reagent K-method, carbonyldiimidazole method, phosphorus reagents or oxidation-reduction methods. Some of these methods (especially the carbodiimide method) can be enhanced by adding 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole or 4-DMAP. These coupling reactions can be performed in either solution (liquid phase) or solid phase.
  • the coupling step involves the dehydrative coupling of a free carboxyl of one reactant with the free amino group of the other reactant in the present of a coupling agent to form a linking amide bond.
  • coupling agents are found in general textbooks on peptide chemistry, for example, M. Bodanszky, "Peptide Chemistry", 2 nd rev ed., Springer- Verlag, Berlin, Germany, (1993).
  • suitable coupling agents are N,N'-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole in the presence of N,N'-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide or N-ethyl-N'-[(3-dimethylamino)propyl]carbodiimide.
  • a practical and useful coupling agent is the commercially available (benzotriazol- 1 -yloxy)tris-(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate, either by itself or in the present of 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole or 4-DMAP.
  • Another practical and useful coupling agent is commercially available 2-(lH-benzotriazol-l-yl)-N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate. Still another practical and useful coupling agent is commercially available O-(7-azabenzotrizol-l-yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate.
  • the coupling reaction is conducted in an inert solvent, e.g. dichloromethane, acetonitrile or dimethylformamide.
  • An excess of a tertiary amine e.g.
  • reaction temperature usually ranges between 0 °C and 50 °C and the reaction time usually ranges between 15 min and 24 h.
  • APG ⁇ -amino group of each amino acid to be coupled to the growing peptide chain
  • Any protecting group known in the art can be used. Examples of such groups include: 1) acyl groups such as formyl, trifluoroacetyl, phthalyl, and p-toluenesulfonyl; 2) aromatic carbamate groups such as benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz or Z) and substituted bensyloxycarbonyls, and
  • the preferred ⁇ -amino protecting group is either Boc or Fmoc. Many amino acid derivatives suitably protected for peptide synthesis are commercially available. The ⁇ -amino protecting group of the newly added amino acid residue is cleaved prior to the coupling of the next amino acid.
  • Boc group the methods of choice are trifluoroacetic acid, neat or in dichloromethane, or HC1 in dioxane or in ethyl acetate.
  • the resulting ammonium salt is then neutralized either prior to the coupling or in situ with basic solutions such as aqueous buffers, or tertiary amines in dichloromethane or acetonitrile or dimethylformamide.
  • the reagents of choice are piperidine or substituted piperidine in dimethylformamide, but any secondary amine can be used.
  • the deprotection is carried out at a temperature between 0°C and room temperature (rt or RT) usually 20-22°C.
  • any of the amino acids having side chain functionalities must be protected during the preparation of the peptide using any of the above-described groups.
  • Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the selection and use of appropriate protecting groups for these side chain functionalities depend upon the amino acid and presence of other protecting groups in the peptide. The selection of such protecting groups is important in that the group must not be removed during the deprotection and coupling of the ⁇ -amino group.
  • the following side chain protecting group are suitable: /--toluenesulfonyl (tosyl) moieties can be used to protect the amino side chain of amino acids such as Lys and Arg; acetamidomethyl, benzyl (Bn), or tert-butylsulfonyl moieties can be used to protect the sulfide containing side chain of cysteine; bencyl (Bn) ethers can be used to protect the hydroxy containing side chains of serine, threonine or hydroxyproline; and benzyl esters can be used to protect the carboxy containing side chains of aspartic acid and glutamic acid.
  • Fmoc is chosen for the ⁇ -amine protection
  • usually tert-butyl based protecting groups are acceptable.
  • Boc can be used for lysine and arginine, tert-butyl ether for serine, tlireonine and hydroxyproline, and tert-butyl ester for aspartic acid and glutamic acid.
  • Triphenylmethyl (Trityl) moiety can be used to protect the sulfide containing side chain of cysteine.
  • Cyclopentanol is treated with phosgene to furnish the corresponding chlorofonnate.
  • the chloroformate is treated with the desired NH 2 -tripeptide in the presence of a base such as triethylamine to afford the cyclopentylcarbamate.
  • the ⁇ -carboxyl group of the C-terminal residue is usually protected as an ester (CPG) that can be cleaved to give the carboxylic acid.
  • CPG ester
  • Protecting groups that can be used include: 1) alkyl esters such as methyl, trimethylsilylethyl and t-butyl, 2) aralkyl esters such as benzyl and substituted benzyl, or 3) esters that can be cleaved by mild base treatment or mild reductive means such as trichloroethyl and phenacyl esters.
  • the resulting ⁇ -carboxylic acid (resulting from cleavage by mild acid, mild base treatment or mild reductive means) is coupled with a Ri(R )NSO 2 NH 2 [prepared by described herein] in the presence of peptide coupling agent such as CDI in the presence of abase such as LiHMDS (lithium bis-hexamethyldisilylamide) to incorporate the PI' moiety, effectively assembling the tripeptide P1'-P1-P2-P3-APG.
  • a Ri(R )NSO 2 NH 2 prepared by described herein
  • abase such as LiHMDS (lithium bis-hexamethyldisilylamide)
  • Scheme II further shows the general process wherein compounds of Formula I are constructed by the coupling of tripeptide carboxylic acid intermediate (1) with a PL sulfamide.
  • Said coupling reaction requires treatment of carboxylic acid (1) with a coupling reagent such as carbonyl diimidazole in a solvent such as THF, which can be heated to reflux, followed by the addition of the formed derivative of (1), to the PL sulfamide, in a solvent such as THF or methylene chloride in the presence of a base such as lithium bishexamethyldisilylamide.
  • TFA amine salt can be directly employed in the subsequent coupling reaction or as an alternative the TFA amine salt can be first converted to the HC1 amine salt, and this HC1 amine salt is used in said coupling reaction as shown in Scheme III.
  • the coupling of said HC1 amine salt (3) with the carboxyl terminus a P4-P3-P2 intermediate can be achieved using coupling reagents, such as HATU, in solvents such as dichloromethane to provide compounds of Formula I (4).
  • the resulting P2-P 1 -P 1" intermediate can be converted to compounds of Formula I in a two step process wherein the first step is deprotection of the P2 amine terminus using an acid such as TFA in a solvent such as methylene chloride.
  • the resulting trifluoroacetic acid salt can be coupled with the carboxyl te ⁇ ninus of the P4-P3 element using standard coupling agents such as PyBop in the 0 presence of base such as diisopropyl amine, and using solvents such methylene chloride to provide compounds of Formula I (4).
  • the P4-P3-P2 intermediate utilized in the above schemes can be constructed as previously described with a further description of this process shown in general Scheme V.
  • the free carboxyl terminus of the P4-P3 intermediate (1) can be coupled to the amino terminus of the P2 element to provide the P4-P3-P2 dipeptide (2).
  • the carboxyl terminus of the P4-P3-P2 intermediate can be deprotected by saponification of the ester group to provide P4-P3-P2 as the free carboxylic acid (3).
  • Intermediates like (3) can be converted to compounds of Formula I using the methods described herein.
  • intermediate (2) can be used as starting materials for the preparation of compounds of Formula I wherein the P3 group is capped with an amide or a sulfonamide, or thiourea, or a sulfamide.
  • the construction of said compounds of Formula I can be achieved using standard conditions for the formation of said P4 functionalities from amines.3
  • PL terminus is incorporated into the molecules using one of the general processes outlined above and described in more detail below.
  • These PL sulfamides can be prepared in a two step process using chlororsulfonylisocyanate as starting material. Said isocynate can be hydrolyzed to the corresponding chlorosulfamoyl chloride by treatment with water in a solvent such as THF. The intermediate sulfamoylchloride upon treatment with an amine, in the presence of a base, provides the desired sulfamide derivatives.
  • the PI elements utilized in generating compounds of Formula I are in some cases commercially available, but are otherwise synthesized using the methods described herein and subsequently incorporated into compounds of Formula I using the methods described herein.
  • the substituted PI cyclopropylamhio acids can be synthesized following the general process outline in Scheme VIII.
  • this reaction is selective in that one of the enantiomers undergoes the reaction at a much greater rate than its mirror image providing for a kinetic resolution of the intermediate racemate.
  • the more preferred stereoisomer for integration into compounds of Formula I is 5a which houses the (1R, 2S) stereochemistry, hi the presence of the enzyme, this enantiomer does not undergo ester cleavage and thereby this enantiomer 5 a is recovered from the reaction mixture.
  • the less preferred enantiomer ,5b with houses the (IS, 2R) stereochemistry undergoes ester cleavage, i.e., hydrolysis, to provide the free acid 6.
  • the ester 5a can be separated from the acid product 6 by routine methods such as, for example, aqueous extraction methods or chromotography.
  • Scheme IX shows the coupling of an N-protected C4-hydroxyproline moiety with a heterocycle to form intermediate (4) and the subsequent modification of said intermediate (4) to a compound of Formula I by the process of peptide elongation as described herein.
  • a base is employed in the first step.
  • this coupling can be done using bases such as potassium tert-butoxide, or sodium hydride, in solvent such as DMF or DMSO or THF.
  • isoquinolines are inco ⁇ orated into the final compounds and specifically into the P2 region of said compounds.
  • One skilled in the art would recognize that a number of general methods are available for the synthesis of isoquinolines. Moreoever, said isoquinolines generated by these methods can be readily incorporated into final compounds of Formula I using the processes described herein.
  • One general methodology for the synthesis of isoquinolines is shown in Scheme XII, wherein cinnamic acid derivatives, shown in general form as structure (2) are
  • acylazides from carboxylic acids as for example said carboxylic acid can be treated with diphenylphosphorylazide (DPP A) in an aprotic solvent such as methylene chloride in the presence of a base.
  • DPP A diphenylphosphorylazide
  • the acylazide (3) is coverted to the corresponding isoquinolone (4) as shown in the Scheme.
  • the acylazide is heated to a temperature of approximately 190 degress celcius in a high boiling solvent such a diphenylmethane. This reaction is general and provides moderate to good yields of substituted isoquinolone from the corresponding cinnamic acid derivatives.
  • said cinnamic acid derivatives are available commercially or can be obtained from the corresponding benzaldehyde (1) derivative by direct condensation with malonic acid or derivatives thereof and also by employing a Wittig reaction.
  • the intermediate isoquinolones (4) of Scheme XII can be converted to the corresponding 1- chloroisoquinoline by treatment with phosphorous oxychloride. This reaction is general and can be applied to any of the isoquinolones, quinolones or additional heterocycles as shown herein to covert a hydroxy substituent to the corresponding chloro compound when said hydroxy is in conjugation with a nitrogen atom in said heterocylic ring systems.
  • the first step in this sequence is the formation of the isoquinoline N-oxide(4) by treatment of isoquinoline (3) with meta-chloroperbenzoic acid in an aprotic solvent such as dichloromethane.
  • Intermediate (4) can be converted to the corresponding 1-chloroquinoline by treatment with phosphorous oxychloroide in refluxing chloroform. Note this two step process is general and can be employed to procure chloroisoquinolines and chloroquinolines from the corresponding isoquinolines and quinolines respectively.
  • Scheme XIV base such as tert-butyl lithium in a solvent such as THF at low temperature. To this reaction mixture is then added a nitrile derivative, which undergoes an addition reaction with the anion derived from deprotonation of (1), resulting in the formation of (2). This reaction is general and can be used for the formation of substituted isoquinolines. Intermediate (2) of Scheme XIV can be converted to the corresponding 1 -chloroquinoline by the methods described herein.
  • keto imine (2) can be converted to the corresponding isoquinoline by condensation with ammom ' um acetate at elevated temperatures.
  • This method is general and can be used for the synthesis of substituted isoquinolines.
  • Said isoquinolines can be converted to the corresponding 1-chloroquinoline by the methods described herein.
  • 6-fluoro-isoquinoline to the corresponding l-chloro-6-alkoxy-isoquinoline species, by treatment of (1) of (eq.l) with a sodium or potassium alkoxide species in the alcohol solvent from which the alkoxide is derived at room temperature. In some cases it may be necessary to heat the reaction to drive it to completion.
  • Said chloroquinolhie can be incorporated into a compound of Formula I using the art described herein.
  • Modifications of a P2 heterocyclic element can also be done after it's incorporation into compounds of Formula I as shown in (eq.2) of Scheme VXII.
  • compounds such as (1) in (eq. 2) which contain a leaving group in the pthalazine nucleus can be displaced by a nucleophile such as an alkoxide in solvents such as the corresponding alcohol from which the alkoxide is derived.
  • a nucleophile such as an alkoxide in solvents such as the corresponding alcohol from which the alkoxide is derived.
  • Scheme XVIII provides a general example for the modification of heterocycles as defined herein by employing palladium mediated coupling reactions.
  • Said couplings can be employed to functionalize a heterocycle at each position of the ring system providing said ring is suitably activated or functionalized, as for example with a chloride as shown in the Scheme.
  • This sequence begins with 1- chloroisoquinoline (1) which upon treatment with metachloroperbenzoic acid can be converted to the corresponding N-oxide (2).
  • Said intermediate (2) can be converted to the corresponding 1,3-dichloroisoquinoline (3) by treatment with phosphorous oxychloride in refluxing chloroform.
  • Intermediate (3) can be coupled with N-Boc-4- hydroxyproline by the methods described herein to provide intermediate (5) as shown in the Scheme.
  • Intermediate (5) can undergo a Suzuki coupling with an aryl boronic acid, in the presence of a palladium reagent and base, and in a solvent such as THF or toluene or DMF to provide the C3-arylisoquinoline intermediate (6).
  • Heteroarylboronic acids can also be employed in this Pd mediated coupling process to provide C3-heteroarylisoquinolines.
  • Intermediate (6) can be converted into final compounds of Formula I by the methods described herein.
  • the isoquinoline ring system of intermediate (3) can be further functionalized by employing either Suzuki couplings (Process 1: subjecting (3) to heteroaryl or aryl boronic acids in the presence of a palladium catalyst such as palladium tetra(triphenylphosphine) and a base such as cesium carbonate in solvents such as DMF) or Stille couplings (Process 2: subjecting (3) to heteraryl or aryl tin dervatives in the presence of palladium catalyst such as palladium tetra(triphenylphosphine in solvents such as toluene).
  • Suzuki couplings Process 1: subjecting (3) to heteroaryl or aryl boronic acids in the presence of a palladium catalyst such as palladium tetra(triphenylphosphine) and a base such as cesium carbonate in solvents such as DMF
  • Stille couplings Process 2: subjecting (3) to heteraryl or aryl
  • Palladium reactions can also be employed to couple C4-arnino proline elements * with functionalized heterocycles.
  • Scheme XX shows intermediate (1) coupling " with a functionalized isoquinoline in the presence of a palladium catalyst and a base in a solvent such as toluene.
  • Intermediates like (3) can be converted to compounds of Formula I using the methods described herein.
  • WO 03/099274 provides extensive examples and teachings on the prepration of proline derivatives as mtermediates and these intermediates can be used in the preparation of compound of Formula 1.
  • compositions comprising a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, e.g., excipient, or vehicle diluent.
  • compositions typically comprises from 0.1 weight percent to 99.9 percent by weight of the composition, and often comprises from about 5 to 95 weight percent.
  • a composition comprising the compound of formula 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition further comprises a compound having anti-HCV activity.
  • anti-HCV activity means the compound is effective to inhibit the function of a target selected from the group consisting of HCV metalloprotease, HCV serine protease, HCV polymerase, HCV helicase, HCV NS4B protein, HCV entry, HCV assembly, HCV egress, HCV NS5A protein, IMPDH and a nucleoside analog for the treatment of an HCV infection.
  • the other compound having anti-HCV activity is effective to inhibit the function of target in the HCV life cycle other than the HCV serine protease.
  • the compound having anti-HCV activity is an interferon.
  • the interferon is selected from the group consisting of interferon alpha 2B, pegylated interferon alpha, consensus interferon, interferon alpha 2 A and lymphoblastiod interferon tau.
  • the compound having anti-HCV activity is selected from the group consisting of interleukin 2, interleukin 6, mterleukin 12, a compound that enhances the development of a type 1 helper T cell response, interfering RNA, anti-sense RNA, hniqimod, ribavirin, an inosine 5'- monophospate dehydrogenase inhibitor, amantadine, and rimantadine.
  • the composition comprises a compound of the invention, an interferon and ribavirin.
  • the compound having anti-HCV activity is a small molecule compound.
  • small molecule compound means a compound having a molecular weight of less than 1,500 daltons, preferably less than 1000 daltons.
  • the small molecule compound is effective to inhibit the function of a target selected from the group consisting of HCV metalloprotease, HCV serine protease, HCV polymerase, HCV helicase, HCV NS4B protein, HCV entry, HCV assembly, HCV egress, HCV NS5A protein, inosine monophophate dehydrogenase (“LMPDH”) and a nucleoside analog for the treatment of an HCV infection.
  • a target selected from the group consisting of HCV metalloprotease, HCV serine protease, HCV polymerase, HCV helicase, HCV NS4B protein, HCV entry, HCV assembly, HCV egress, HCV NS5A protein, inosine monophophate dehydrogenase (“
  • Table 1 lists some illustrative examples of compounds that can be administered with the compounds of this invention.
  • the compounds of the invention can be administered with other anti-HCV activity compounds in combination therapy, either jointly or separately, or by combining the compounds into a composition.
  • compositions of this invention may be administered orally, parenterally or via an implanted reservoir. Oral administration or administration by injection are preferred. In some cases, the pH of the formulation may be adjusted with pharmaceutically acceptable acids, bases or buffers to enhance the stability of the formulated compound or its delivery form.
  • parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intracutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intra- articular, intrasynovial, intrasternal, intrathecal, and intralesional injection or infusion techniques.
  • compositions of this invention may be administered in any orally acceptable dosage form including, but not limited to, capsules, tablets, and aqueous suspensions and solutions, h the case of tablets for oral use, carriers which are commonly used include lactose and corn starch.
  • Lubricating agents such as magnesium stearate, are also typically added.
  • useful diluents include lactose and dried corn starch.
  • the active ingredient is combined with emulsifying and suspending agents.
  • certain sweetening and/or flavoring and/or coloring agents may be added.
  • suitable carriers for the above noted compositions can be found in standard pharmaceutical texts, e.g. in "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences", 19th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Penn., 1995.
  • compositions of this invention can be prepared by known procedures using well-known and readily available ingredients.
  • the compositions of this invention may be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures well known in the art.
  • the active ingredient will usually be admixed with a carrier, or diluted by a carrier, or enclosed within a carrier which may be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container.
  • the carrier serves as a diluent, it may be a solid, semi-solid or liquid material which acts as a vehicle, excipient or medium for the active ingredient.
  • compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, beadlets, lozenges, sachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols, (as a solid or in a liquid medium), soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, sterile packaged powders and the like. Further details concerning the design and preparation of suitable delivery forms of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are known to those skilled in the art.
  • Dosage levels of between about 0.01 and about 1000 milligram per kilogram (“mg/kg”) body weight per day, preferably between about 0.5 and about 250 mg/kg body weight per day of the compounds of the invention are typical in a monotherapy for the prevention and treatment of HCV mediated disease.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention will be administered from about 1 to about 5 times per day or alternatively, as a continuous infusion. Such administration can be used as a chronic or acute therapy.
  • the amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated and the particular mode of administration.
  • compositions of this invention comprise a combination of a compound of the invention and one or more additional therapeutic or prophylactic agent
  • both the compound and the additional agent are usually present at dosage levels of between about 10 to 100%), and more preferably between about 10 and 80% of the dosage normally administered in a monotherapy regimen.
  • these compounds or their pharmaceutically acceptable enantiomers, diastereomers, salts, solvates or prodrugs are formulated together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, the resulting composition may be administered in vivo to mammals, such as man, to inhibit HCV serine protease or to treat or prevent HCV virus infection.
  • another aspect of this invention provides methods of inhibiting HVC serine protease activity in patients by administering a compound of the present invention or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
  • a method of inhibiting the function of the HCV serine protease comprising contacting the HCV serine protease with a compound of the invention.
  • a method of treating an HCV infection in a patient comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, prodrug or salt thereof.
  • the method of administering the compound is effective to inhibit the function of the HCV serine protease.
  • the method further comprises administering another compound having anti-HCV activity (as described above) prior to, after or concurrently with a compound of the invention.
  • the compounds of the invention may also be used as laboratory reagents.
  • Compounds may be instrumental in providing research tools for designing of viral replication assays, validation of animal assay systems and stmctural biology studies to further enhance knowledge of the HCV disease mechanisms. Further, the compounds of the present invention are useful in establishing or determining the binding site of other antiviral compounds, for example, by competitive inhibition.
  • the compounds of this invention may also be used to treat or prevent viral contamination of materials and therefore reduce the risk of viral infection of laboratory or medical personnel or patients who come in contact with such materials, e.g., blood, tissue, surgical instruments and garments, laboratory mstruments and garments, and blood collection or transfusion apparatuses and materials.
  • materials e.g., blood, tissue, surgical instruments and garments, laboratory mstruments and garments, and blood collection or transfusion apparatuses and materials.
  • the compounds and compositions of the invention can be used for the manufacture of a medicament for treating an HCV infection in a patient.
  • Solution percentages express a weight to volume relationship, and solution ratios express a volume to volume relationship, unless stated otherwise.
  • Nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectra were recorded either on a Bruker 300, 400 or 500 MHz spectrometer; the chemical shifts (6) are reported in parts per million. Flash chromatography was carried out on silica gel (SiO 2 ) according to Still's flash chromatography technique (W.C. Still et al, J. Org. Chem., (1978), 43, 2923).
  • each compound was analyzed by LC/MS, using one of seven methodologies, having the following conditions.
  • the dark reaction mixture was partitioned between ether (200 mL) and water (600 mL).
  • the aqueous phase was acidified to pH 4 using 4N HC1.
  • the resulting milky yellow solution was extracted with ether (4 x 200 mL).
  • the combined ether extracts were dried (MgSO 4 ), filtered, and concentrated hi vacuo to give a golden oil.
  • 6-Methoxy-2r7-isoquinolin-1-one To a solution of 3-methoxy cinnamic acid ( 11.04 g, 62 mmol), triethylamine (12.52 g, 124 mmol) in acetone (80 mL) was added ethyl chloroformate dropwise at 0°C. After stirring at this ternperature for 1 h, aqueous NaN 3 (6.40 g, 100 mmol in 35 mL H 2 O) was added dropwise and the reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h at the ambient temperature. Water (100 mL) was added to the mixture and the volatile was removed in vacuo.
  • Glycine ethyl ester hydrochloride (303.8 g, 2.16 mole) was suspended in tert- butylmethyl ether (1.6 L). Benzaldehyde (231 g, 2.16 mole) and anhydrous sodium sulfate (154.6 g, 1.09 mole) were added and the mixture cooled to 0 °C using an ice- water bath. Triethylamine (455 mL, 3.26 mole) was added dropwise over 30 min and the mixture stirred for 48 h at rt. The reaction was then quenched by addition of ice- cold water (1 L) and the organic layer was separated.
  • N-Boc-(li2,2S)/(lS,2R)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester (9.39 g, 36.8 mmol) was dissolved in 4 ⁇ HCl/dioxane (90ml, 360 mmol) and was stirred for 2 h at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated to supply (li?,2S)/(lS,2i?)- l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester hydrochloride in quanitative yield (7 g, 100%).
  • the enantio-excess of the ester was determined to be 97.2%, and the reaction was cooled to room temperature (26°C) and stirred overnight (16h) after which the enantio-excess of the ester was determined to be 100%.
  • the pH of the reaction mixture was then adjusted to 8.5 with 50% ⁇ aOH and the resulting mixture was extracted with MTBE (2 x 2 L).
  • the aqueous layer from the extraction process was then acidified to pH 2 with 50% H 2 SO and extracted with MTBE (2 x 2 L).
  • the MTBE extract was washed with water (3 x 100 mL) and evaporated to give the acid as light yellow solid (42.74 g; purity: 99% @ 210 nm, containing no ester).
  • enantio-excess of the ester was determined to be 44.3% as following: 0.1 mL of the reaction mixture was removed and mixed well with 1 mL ethanol; after centrifugation, 10 microliter (" ⁇ l") of the supernatant was analyzed with the chiral HPLC. To the remaining reaction mixture, 0.1 mL of DMSO was added, and the plate was incubated for additional 3 days at 250 rpm at 40°C, after which four mL of ethanol was added to the well. After centrifugation, 10 ⁇ l of the supernatant was analyzed with the chiral HPLC and enantio-excess of the ester was determined to be 100%.
  • enantio-excess of the ester was determined to be 39.6% as following: 0.1 mL of the reaction mixture was removed and mixed well with 1 mL ethanol; after cenrifugation, 10 ⁇ l of the supernatant was analyzed with the chiral HPLC. To the remaining reaction mixture, 0.1 mL of DMSO was added, and the plate was incubated for additional 3 days at 250 rpm at 40°C, after which four mL of ethanol was added to the well. After centrifugation, 10 ⁇ l of the supernatant was analyzed with the chiral HPLC and enantio-excess of the ester was determined to be 100%.
  • Solvent A, 1 millimolar ("mM”) HC1 in water; B, MeCN Gradient: 30% B for 1 min; 30% to 45% B over 0.5 min; 45% B for 1.5 min; 45% to
  • Step 1 Preparation of 2-Ethylcyclopropane-l,l-dicarboxylic acid di-tert-butyl ester, shown below.
  • Step 2 Preparation of racemic 2-Ethylcyclopropane-l,l-dicarboxylic acid tert-butyl ester, shown below.
  • Step 1 The product of Step 1 (18.3 g, 67.8 mmol) was added to a suspension of potassium tert-butoxide (33.55 g, 299.0 mmol) in dry ether (500 mL) at 0 °C, followed by H 2 0 (1.35 mL, 75.0 mmol) and was vigorously stirred overnight at rt.
  • the reaction mixture was poured in a mixture of ice and water and washed with ether (3 ).
  • the aqueous layer was acidified with a 10% aq. citric acid solution at 0°C and extracted with EtOAc (3x).
  • the combined organic layers were washed with water (2x), brine, dried (MgSO 4 ) and concentrated in vacuo to afford the titled product as a pale yellow oil (10 g, 46.8 mmol, 69% yield).
  • Step 3 Preparation of (1R,2R)/(IS,2S) 2-Ethyl-l-(2- trimethylsilanylethoxycarbonylamino)cyclopropane-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester, shown below.
  • reaction mixture was filtered, diluted with Et 2 O, washed with a 10% aqueous citric acid solution, water, saturated aqueous NaHCO 3 , water (2x), brine (2X), dried (MgSO 4 ) and concentrated in vacuo.
  • the intermediate sulfamoyl chloride was prepared by addition of water (1 equiv) in THF to a cold (-20 °C) stirred solution of chlorosulfonyl isocyanate (1 equiv) in THF and the resulting solution allowed to warm to 0 °C. To this solution was added anhydrous Et 3 N (1 equiv) followed by requisite secondary amine (1 equiv). The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature, then filtered and the filtrate was rotary evaporated to afford the desired sulfamides.
  • the key step in the preparation of Compounds 1-13 is the coupling of a tripeptide carboxylic acid and a sulfamide to provide the desired tripeptide sulfamide:
  • the general reaction scheme of this key step is shown below:
  • Compound 2 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 2 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using methoxymethylamine in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.070 min.), MS m/z 767 (MH*).
  • Compound 5 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 5 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using N-methylaniline in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.503 min.), MS m/z 813 (MH + ).
  • Compound 7 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 7 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using isopropylmethylamie in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.420 min.), MS m/z 779 (MH*).
  • Compound 10 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 10 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using piperidine in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.453 min.), MS m/z 791 (MH + ).
  • Compound 13 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. hi the case of Compound 13 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using N-methylpiperizine in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 1.923 min.), MS m/z 806 (MH ).
  • Compound 15 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. In the case of Compound 15 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using dimethylamine in place of methylethylamine.. LC-MS (retention time: 2.463 min.), MS m/z 793 (MH ).
  • Compound 16 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. In the case of Compound 16 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using N-methylaniline in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.723 min.), MS m/z 856 ( H 1 ).
  • Compound 17 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19.
  • the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using dimethylamine in place of methylethylamine, and 6-methoxy-l-chloroisoquinoline was used in place of 2- phenyl-4-chloro-7-methoxyquinoline.
  • LC-MS retention time: 2.807 min.
  • Compound 18 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. In the case of Compound 18 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using pyrrolidine in place of methylethylamine, and 6-methoxy-l-chloroisoquinoline was used in place of 2- phenyl-4-chloro-7-methoxyquinoline. LC-MS (retention time: 2.927 min.), MS m/z 743 (MH + ).
  • Compound 19 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. In the case of Compound 19 however, 6-methoxy-l-chloroisoquinoline was used in place of 2-phenyl-4-chloro-7- methoxyquinoline.
  • Compound 20 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19.
  • the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using N-methylaniline in place of methylethylamine, and 6-methoxy-l-chloroisoquinoline was used in place of 2- phenyl-4-chloro-7-methoxyquinoline.
  • Compound 21 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19.
  • the acylsulfamide, employed was synthesized using methylisopropylamine in place of methylethylamine, and 6-methoxy-l-chloroisoquinoline was used in place of 2- phenyl-4-chloro-7-methoxyquinoline.
  • LC-MS retention time: 2.963 min.
  • MS m/z 768 M+Na + ).
  • Compound 22 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. hi the case of Compound 22 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using methylisopropylamine in place of methylethylamine, and 1-chloroisoquinoline was used in place of 2-phenyl-4-chloro- 7-methoxyquinolin LC-MS (retention time: 2.993 min.), MS m/z 737 (M+Na ).
  • Compound 23 can be prepared by synthesis methods such as described herein.
  • This in vitro assay was to measure the inhibition of HCV NS3 protease complexes, derived from the BMS strain, H77 strain or J416S strain, as described below, by compounds of the present invention. This assay provides an indication of how effective compounds of the present invention would be in inhibiting HCV proteolytic activity.
  • Serum from an HCV-infected patient was obtained from Dr. T. Wright, San
  • An engineered full-length cDNA (compliment deoxyribonucleic acid) template of the HCV genome was constructed from DNA fragments obtained by reverse transcription-PCR (RT-PCR) of serum RNA (ribonucleic acid) and using primers selected on the basis of homology between other genotype la strains. From the determination of the entire genome sequence, a genotype la was assigned to the HCV isolate according to the classification of
  • the H77 and J4L6S strains were used for production of recombinant NS3/4A protease complexes.
  • DNA encoding the recombinant HCV NS3/4A protease complex (amino acids 1027 to 1711) for these strains were manipulated as described by P. Gallinari et al. (see Gallinari P, Paolini C, Brennan D, Nardi C, Steinkuhler C, De Francesco R. Biochemistry. 38(17):5620-32, (1999)). Briefly, a three-lysine solubilizing tail was added at the 3'-end of the NS4A coding region.
  • the cysteine in the PI position of the NS4A-NS4B cleavage site was changed to a glycine to avoid the proteolytic cleavage of the lysine tag. Furthermore, a cysteine to serine mutation was introduced by PCR at amino acid position 1454 to prevent the autolytic cleavage in the NS3 helicase domain.
  • the variant DNA fragment was cloned in the pET21b bacterial expression vector (Novagen) and the NS3/4A complex was expressed in Escherichia. coli strain BL21 (DE3) (Invitrogen) following the protocol described by P. Gallinari et al.
  • the cells were resuspended in lysis buffer (10 mL/g) consisting of 25 mM N-(2-Hydroxyethyl)Piperazine-N'-(2 -Ethane Sulfonic acid) (HEPES), pH 7.5, 20% glycerol, 500 mM Sodium Chloride (NaCl), 0.5% Triton X- 100, 1 microgram/milliliter (“ ⁇ g/mL”) lysozyme, 5 mM Magnesium Chloride (MgCl 2 ), 1 ⁇ g/ml Dnasel, 5mM ⁇ -Mercaptoethanol ( ⁇ ME), Protease inhibitor - Ethylenediamine Tetraacetic acid (EDTA) free (Roche), homogenized and incubated for 20 minutes (min) at 4°C.
  • lysis buffer 10 mL/g
  • HEPES N-(2-Hydroxyethyl)Piperazine
  • the homogenate was sonicated and clarified by ultra-centrifugation at 235000 g for 1 h at 4°C. Imidazole was added to the supernatant to a final concentration of 15 mM and the pH adjusted to 8.0.
  • the crude protein extract was loaded on a Nickel - Nifrilotriacetic acid (Ni-NTA) column pre- equilibrated with buffer B (25 mM HEPES, pH 8.0, 20% glycerol, 500 mM NaCl, 0.5% Triton X-100, 15 mM imidazole, 5 mM ⁇ ME). The sample was loaded at a flow rate of 1 mL/min.
  • the column was washed with 15 column volumes of buffer C (same as buffer B except with 0.2% Triton X-100).
  • the protein was eluted with 5 column volumes of buffer D (same as buffer C except with 200 mM Imidazole).
  • NS3/4A protease complex-containing fractions were pooled and loaded on a desalting column Superdex-S200 pre-equilibrated with buffer D (25mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 20% glycerol, 300 mM NaCl, 0.2% Triton X-100, 10 mM ⁇ ME). Sample was loaded at a flow rate of 1 mL/min. NS3/4A protease complex-containing fractions were pooled and concentrated to approximately 0.5 mg/ml. The purity of the NS3/4A protease complexes, derived from the BMS, H77 and J4L6S strains, were judged to be greater than 90% by SDS-PAGE and mass spectrometry analyses.
  • the enzyme was stored at -80°C, thawed on ice and diluted prior to use in assay buffer.
  • the substrate used for the NS3/4A protease assay was RET SI (Resonance Energy Transfer Depsipeptide Substrate; AnaSpec, Inc. cat # 22991)(FRET peptide), described by Taliani et al. in Anal. Biochem. 240(2):60-67 (1996).
  • the sequence of this peptide is loosely based on the NS4A/NS4B natural cleavage site for the HCV NS3 protease except there is an ester linkage rather than an amide bond at the cleavage site.
  • the peptide substrate was incubated with one of the three recombinant NS3/4A protease complexes, in the absence or presence of a compound of the present invention, and the formation of fluorescent reaction product was followed in real time using a Cytofluor Series 4000.
  • HEPES and Glycerol were obtained from GIBCO-BRL.
  • Dimethyl Sulfoxide (DMSO) was obtained from Sigma, ⁇ - Mercaptoethanol was obtained from Bio Rad.
  • Assay buffer 50 mM HEPES, pH 7.5; 0.15 M NaCl; 0.1% Triton; 15% Glycerol; 10 mM ⁇ ME.
  • Substrate 2 ⁇ M final concentration (from a 2 mM stock solution in DMSO stored at -20°C).
  • HCV NS3/4A protease type la (lb) 2-3 nM final concentration (from a 5 ⁇ M stock solution in 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 20% glycerol, 300 mM NaCl, 0.2% Triton-XlOO, 10 mM ⁇ ME).
  • the assay was made more sensitive by adding 50 ⁇ g/ml Bovine Serum Albumin (Sigma) to the assay buffer and reducing the end protease concentration to 300 pM.
  • the assay was performed in a 96-well polystyrene black plate from Falcon. Each well contained 25 ⁇ l NS3/4A protease complex in assay buffer, 50 ⁇ l of a compound of the present invention in 10% DMSO/assay buffer and 25 ⁇ l substrate in assay buffer. A control (no compound) was also prepared on the same assay plate. The enzyme complex was mixed with compound or control solution for 1 min before initiating the enzymatic reaction by the addition of substrate. The assay plate was read immediately using the Cytofluor Series 4000 (Perspective Biosystems). The instrument was set to read an emission of 340 nm and excitation of 490 nm at 25 °C. Reactions were generally followed for approximately 15 min.
  • ⁇ F is the change in fluorescence over the linear range of the curve.
  • IC 50 50% effective concentration
  • Specificity Assays were performed to demonstrate the in vitro selectivity of the compounds of the present invention in inhibiting HCV NS3/4A protease complex as compared to other serine or cysteine proteases.
  • the specificities of compounds of the present invention were determined against a variety of serine proteases: human neutrophil elastase (HNE), porcine pancreatic elastase (PPE) and human pancreatic ch ⁇ * motr psin and one cysteine protease: human liver cathepsin B.
  • HNE human neutrophil elastase
  • PPE porcine pancreatic elastase
  • human pancreatic ch ⁇ * motr psin and one cysteine protease human liver cathepsin B.
  • pNA colorimetric p-nitroaniline
  • Each assay included a 2 h enzyme-inhibitor pre-incubation at room temperature followed by addition of substrate and hydrolysis to ⁇ 30% conversion as measured on a Spectramax Pro microplate reader. Compound concentrations varied " from 1.00 to 0.4 ⁇ M depending on their potency.
  • Tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane hydrochloride pH 8
  • HCV replicon whole cell system was established as described by Lobmann V, Korner F, Koch J, Herian U, Theifmann L, Bartenschlager R., Science 285(5424): 110-3 (1999). This system enabled us to evaluate the effects of our HCV Protease compounds on HCV RNA replication.
  • an HCV cDNA was generated encoding the 5' internal ribosome entry site (IRES), the neomycin resistance gene, the EMCV (encephalomyocarditis viurs)-IRES and the HCV nonstractural proteins, NS3-NS5B, and 3' non-translated region (NTR).
  • IRS 5' internal ribosome entry site
  • EMCV encephalomyocarditis viurs
  • NTR 3' non-translated region
  • Huh7 cells constitutively expressing the HCV replicon, were grown in Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Media (DMEM) containing 10% Fetal calf serum (FCS) and 1 mg/ml G418 (Gibco-BRL). Cells were seeded the night before (1.5 x 10 4 cells/well) in 96-well tissue-culture sterile plates. Compound and no compound controls were prepared in DMEM containing 4% FCS, 1 : 100 Penicillin / Streptomysin, 1:100 L-glutamine and 5% DMSO in the dilution plate (0.5% DMSO final concentration in the assay). Compound / DMSO mixes were added to the cells and incubated for 4 days at 37°C.
  • DMEM Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Media
  • FCS Fetal calf serum
  • G418 Gibco-BRL
  • lysis assay reagent containing the FRET peptide (RET SI, as described for the in vitro enzyme assay).
  • the lysis assay reagent was made from 5X cell Luciferase cell culture lysis reagent (Promega #E153A) diluted to IX with distilled water, NaCl added to 150 mM final, the FRET peptide diluted to 10 ⁇ M final from a 2 mM stock in 100% DMSO.
  • the plate was then placed into the Cytofluor 4000 instrument which had been set to 340 nm excitation / 490 nm emission, automatic mode for 21 cycles and the plate read in a kinetic mode. EC 50 determinations were carried out as described for the IC 50 determinations.
  • RNA assays Two different secondary assays were used to confirm EC 50 determinations from the replicon FRET assay. These included a quantitative RNA assay and a transient luciferase cell reporter assay. For the quantitative RNA assay, compound / no compound controls were incubated with the cells as described for the replicon FRET assay. After 4 days, cells were lyzed using the Rneasy kit (Qiagen). Purified total RNA was normalized using RiboGreen (Jones LJ, Yue ST, Cheung CY, Singer VL, Anal.
  • the luciferase reporter assay was also used to confirm compound potency in the replicon. Utilization of a replicon luciferase reporter assay was first described by Krieger et al (Krieger N, Lohmann V, and Bartenschlager R, J. Virol. 75(10)4614- 4624 (2001)). The replicon construct described for our FRET assay was modified by replacing the resistance gene neomycin with the Blasticidin-resistance gene fused to the N-terminus of the humanized form of Renilla luciferase (restriction sites Ascl / Pmel used for the subcloning).
  • the adaptive mutation at position 1179 was also introduced (Blight KJ, Kolykhalov, AA, Rice, CM, Science 290(5498): 1972-1974).
  • the luciferase reporter assay was set up by seeding huh7 cells the night before at a density of 2 x 10 ⁇ cells per T75 flask. Cells were washed the next day with 7.5 ml Opti-MEM. Following the invitrogen protocol, 40 ⁇ l DMRIE-C was vortexed with 5 ml Opti-MEM before adding 5 ⁇ g HCV reporter replicon RNA. The mix was added to the washed huh7 cells and left for 4 h at 37°C.
  • % control average luciferase signal in experimental wells (+ compound) average luciferase signal in DMSO control wells (- compound)
  • Representative compounds of the invention were assessed in the HCV replicon cell assay described above and/or in several of the outlined specificity assays described above.
  • Compound 9 was found to have an IC 50 of 128 nM against the BMS strain of the NS3/4A protease complex in the enzyme assay described above. Similar potency values were obtained with the published H77 (IC 50 of 62 nM) and J4L6S (IC 0 of 41 nM) strains.
  • the EC 50 value in the replicon assay was 403 nM.
  • the compounds inhibited below were tested for biological activity according to the HCV replican cell assay described above and were found to have activities set forth in Table 2 below.
  • the activity ranges were classified into the following groups: for IC 50 , and EC 50 , A (least active) >1.5 ⁇ M; B 0.15-1.5 ⁇ M; C (most active) ⁇ 0.15 ⁇ M.
  • the IC 50 values are from about 0.001-1 ⁇ M, and most preferably less than 0.1 ⁇ M.
  • the EC 50 values are from about 0.001 to 25 ⁇ M, more preferably from about 0.001-1 ⁇ M and most preferably less than about 0.1 ⁇ M.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
  • Medicines Containing Material From Animals Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)

Abstract

Compounds are disclosed having general formula (I), wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R', B, Y and X are described in the description. Compositions comprising the compounds and methods for using the compounds to inhibit HCV are also disclosed.

Description

HEPATITIS C VIRUS INHIBITORS
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention is generally directed to antiviral compounds, and more specifically directed to compounds which inhibit the functioning of the NS3 protease (also referred to herein as "serine protease") encoded by Hepatitis C virus (HCV), compositions comprising such compounds and methods for inhibiting the functioning of the NS 3 protease .
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
HCV is a major human pathogen, infecting an estimated 170 million persons worldwide - roughly five times the number infected by human immunodeficiency virus type 1. A substantial fraction of these HCV infected individuals develop serious progressive liver disease, including cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma. (Lauer, G. M.; Walker, B. D. N. Engl. J. Med. (2001), 345, 41-52).
Presently, the most effective HCV therapy employs a combination of alpha- interferon and ribavirin, leading to sustained efficacy in 40% of patients. (Poynard, T. et al. Lancet (1998), 352, 1426-1432). Recent clinical results demonstrate that pegylated alpha-interferon is superior to unmodified alpha-interferon as monotherapy (Zeuzem, S. et al. N. Engl. J. Med. (2000), 343, 1666-1672). However, even with experimental therapeutic regimens involving combinations of pegylated alpha- interferon and ribavirin, a substantial fraction of patients do not have a sustained reduction in viral load. Thus, there is a clear and long-felt need to develop effective therapeutics for treatment of HCV infection.
HCV is a positive-stranded RNA virus. Based on a comparison of the deduced amino acid sequence and the extensive similarity in the 5' untranslated region, HCV has been classified as a separate genus in the Flaviviridae family. All members of the Flaviviridae family have enveloped virions that contain a positive stranded RNA genome encoding all known virus-specific proteins via translation of a single, uninterrupted, open reading frame.
Considerable heterogeneity is found within the nucleotide and encoded amino acid sequence throughout the HCV genome. At least six major genotypes have been characterized, and more than 50 subtypes have been described. The major genotypes of HCV differ hi their distribution worldwide, and the clinical significance of the genetic heterogeneity of HCV remains elusive despite numerous studies of the possible effect of genotypes on pathogenesis and therapy.
The single strand HCV RNA genome is approximately 9500 nucleotides in length and has a single open reading frame (ORF) encoding a single large polyprotein of about 3000 amino acids. In infected cells, this polyprotein is cleaved at multiple sites by cellular and viral proteases to produce the structural and non- structural (NS) proteins. In the case of HCV, the generation of mature non-structural proteins (NS2, NS3, NS4A, NS4B, JNS5A, and NS5B) is effected by two viral proteases. The first one is believed to cleave at the NS2-NS3 junction; the second one is a serine protease contained within the N-terminal region of NS3 and mediates all the subsequent cleavages downstream of NS3, both in cis, at the NS3-NS4A cleavage site, and in trans, for the remaining NS4A- NS4B, NS4B-NS5A, NS5A-NS5B sites. The NS4A protein appears to serve multiple functions, acting as a cofactor for the NS3 protease and possibly assisting in the membrane localization of NS3 and other viral replicase components. The complex formation of the NS3 protein with NS4A seems necessary to the processing events, enhancing the proteolytic efficiency at all of the sites. The NS3 protein also exhibits nucleoside triphosphatase and RNA helicase activities. NS5B is a RNA-dependent RNA polymerase that is involved in the replication of HCV.
Among the compounds that have demonstrated efficacy in inhibiting HCV replication, as selective HCV serine protease inhibitors, are the peptide compounds disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 6,323,180. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to compounds having the formula
Figure imgf000006_0001
wherein:
(a) Ri and R2 are each independently -s alkyl, C3- cycloalkyl, C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C6-10 aryl, C -14 alkylaryl, C9-14 cycloalkylaryl, C7-14 alkoxyaryl, C9-14 cycloalkoxyaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C -14 alkylheteroaryl; or Ri and R2, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 4-8 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
(b) is 1 or 2; (c) n is 1 or 2;
(d) R3 is H or C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl or C3-7 cycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with halogen;
(e) R4 is C1-8 alkyl optionally substituted with halo, cyano, amino, C1-6 dialkylamino, C6-10 aryl, C7-14 alkylaryl, C1-6 alkoxy, carboxy, hydroxy, aryloxy, C -1 alkylaryloxy, C2-6 alkylester or C8-15 alkylarylester; C3-12 alkenyl; C3- cycloalkyl or C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, wherein the cycloalkyl or alkylcycloalkyl are optionally substituted with hydroxy, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl or C1-6 alkoxy; or R3 together with the carbon atom to which it is attached forms a C3-7 cycloalkyl group optionally substituted with C2-6 alkenyl; (f) Y is H, phenyl substituted with nitro, pyridyl substituted with nitro, or Cι-5 alkyl optionally substituted with cyano, hydroxyl or C3-7 cycloalkyl; provided that if R5 or R6 is H then Y is H;
(g) B is H, C1-6 alkyl, R5-(C=O)-, R5O(C*=O)-, R5-N(R6)-C(=O)-, R5-N(R6)-C(=S)-, R5SO2-, or R5-N(R6)-SO2-;
(h) R5 is (i) Ci-io alkyl optionally substituted with phenyl, carboxyl, C1-6 alkanoyl, 1-3 halogen, hydroxy, -OC(O)Cι-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, amino optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amido; (ii) C3-7 cycloalkyl, C3.7 cycloalkoxy, or C4-1o alkylcycloalklyl, each optionally substituted with hydroxy, carboxyl, (C1-6 alkoxy)carbonyl, amino optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amido; (iii) C6_ιo aryl or C -16 arylalkyl, each optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, halogen, nitro, hydroxy, amido, (lower alkyl) amido, or amino optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl; (iv) Het; (v) bicyclo(l.l.l)pentane; or (vi) -C(O)OC1-6 alkyl, C -6alkenyl or C2-6 alkynyl; (i) R is H; Cι-6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 halogens; or C1-6 alkoxy provided R5 is C1-10 alkyl; (j) X is 0, S, SO, SO2, OCH2, CH2O or NH; (k) R' is Het, Cό-to aryl or C7-14 alkylaryl, each optionally substituted with
Ra; and (1) Ra is C1-6 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C3-7 cycloalkoxy, halo- - β alkyl, CF3, mono-or di- halo-C1-6 alkoxy, cyano, halo, thioalkyl, hydroxy, alkanoyl, NO2, SH, , amino, C1-6 alkylamino, di (Cι-6) alkylamino, di ( -β) alkylamide, carboxyl, (C^) carboxyester, C1-6 alkylsulfone, Cι-6 alkylsulfonamide, di (Ci-6) alkyl(alkoxy)amine, C - 10 aryl, C7-j4 alkylaryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof.
The present invention also provides compositions comprising the compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates or prodrugs thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In particular, the present invention provides pharmaceutical compositions useful for inhibiting HCV NS3 comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
The present invention further provides methods for treating patients infected with HCV, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof. Additionally, the present invention provides methods of inhibiting HCV NS3 protease by contacting the NS3 protease with a compound of the present invention.
By virute of the present invention, it is now possible to provide improved drugs comprising the compounds of the invention which can be effective in the treatment of patients infected with HCV. Specifically, the present invention provides peptide compounds that can inhibit the functioning of the NS3 protease, e.g., in combination with the NS4A protease. Further, the present invention makes it possible to administer combination therapy to a patient whereby a compound in accordance with the present invention, which is effective to inhibit the HCV NS3 protease, can be administered with another compound having anti-HCV activity, e.g., a compound which is effective to inhibit the function of a target selected from the group consisting of HCV metalloprotease, HCV serine protease, HCV polymerase, HCV helicase, HCV NS4B protein, HCV entry, HCV assembly, HCV egress, HCV NS5A protein, IMPDH and a nucleoside analog for the treatment of an HCV infection.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
Stereochemical definitions and conventions used herein generally follow McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Chemical Terms, S. P. Parker, Ed., McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York (1984) and Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds, Eliel, E. and Wilen, S., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York (1994). Many organic compounds exist in optically active forms, i.e., they have the ability to rotate the plane of plane-polarized light. In describing an optically active compound, the prefixes D and L or R and S are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center(s). The prefixes d and 1 or (+) and (-) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with (-) or 1 meaning that the compound is levorotatory and (+) or d, meaning the compound, is dextrorotatory. For a given chemical structure, these compounds, called stereoisomers, are identical except that they are mirror images of one another. A specific stereoisomer of a mirror image pair may also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture. With reference to the instances where (R) or (S) is used, it is to designate the absolute configuration of a substituent in context to the whole compound and not in context to the substituent alone.
Unless otherwise specifically noted herein, the terms set forth below will have the following definitions.
The terms "racemic mixture" and "racemate" refer to an equimolar mixture of two enantiomeric species, devoid of optical activity.
The term "chiral" refers to molecules which have the property of non- superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term "achiral" refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner.
The term "stereoisomers" refers to compounds which have identical chemical composition, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space.
The term "diastereorner" refers to a stereoisomer which is not an enantiomer, e.g., a stereoisomer with two or more centers of chirality and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another. Diastereomers have different physical properties, e.g. melting points, boiling points, spectral properties, and reactivities. Mixtures of diastereomers may separate under high resolution analytical procedures such as electrophoresis and chromatography. The term "enantiomers" refers to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non-superimposable mirror images of one another.
The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" is intended to include nontoxic salts synthesized from a compound which contains a basic or acidic moiety by conventional chemical methods. Generally, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, nonaqueous media like ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile are preferred. Lists of suitable salts are found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, PA, 1990, p. 1445. The compounds of the present invention are useful in the form of the free base or acid or in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. All forms are within the scope of the invention.
The term "therapeutically effective amount" means the total amount of each active component that is sufficient to show a meaningful patient benefit, e.g., a sustained reduction in viral load. When applied to an individual active ingredient, administered alone, the term refers to that ingredient alone. When applied to a combination, the term refers to combined amounts of the active ingredients that result in the therapeutic effect, whether administered in combination, serially or simultaneously.
The term "compounds of the invention", and equivalent expressions, are meant to embrace compounds of formula I, and pharmaceutically acceptable enantiomer, diastereomer salts, and solvates, e.g. hydrates, and prodrugs. Similarly, references to intermediates, are meant to embrace their salts, and solvates, where the context so permits. References to the compound of the invention also include the preferred compounds, e.g. formula II and A-M.
The term "derivative" means a chemically modified compound wherein the modification is considered routine by the ordinary skilled chemist, such as an ester or an amide of an acid, protecting groups, such as a benzyl group for an alcohol or thiol, and tert-butoxycarbonyl group for an amine.
The term "solvate" means a physical association of a compound of this invention with one or more solvent molecules, whether organic or inorganic. This physical association includes hydrogen bonding. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. "Solvate" encompasses both solution-phase and isolable solvates. Exemplary solvates include hydrates, ethanolates, methanolates, isopropanolates and the like.
The term "prodrug" as used herein means derivatives of the compounds of the invention which have chemically or metabolically cleavable groups and become, by solvolysis or under physiological conditions, the compounds of the invention which are pharmaceutically active in vivo. A prodrug of a compound may be formed in a conventional manner with a functional group of the compounds such as with an amino, hydroxy or carboxy group when present. The prodrug derivative form often offers advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility, or delayed release in a mammalian organism (see, Bundgard, H., Design of Prodrugs, pp. 7-9, 21-24, Elsevier, Amsterdam 1985). Prodrugs include acid derivatives well known to practitioners of the art, such as, for example, esters prepared by reaction of the parent acidic compound with a suitable alcohol, or amides prepared by reaction of the parent acid compound with a suitable amine.
The term "patient" includes both human and other mammals.
The term "pharmaceutical composition" means a composition comprising a compound of the invention in combination with at least one additional pharmaceutical carrier, i.e., adjuvant, excipient or vehicle, such as diluents, preserving agents, fillers, flow regulating agents, disintegrating agents, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, suspending agents, sweetening agents, flavoring agents, perfuming agents, antibacterial agents, antifungal agents, lubricating agents and dispensing agents, depending on the nature of the mode of administration and dosage forms. Ingredients listed in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18 ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, PA (1999) for example, may be used.
The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable" is employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of patients without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication commensurate with a reasonable risk/benefit ratio.
The term "treating" refers to: (i) preventing a disease, disorder or condition from occurring in a patient which may be predisposed to the disease, disorder and/or condition but has not yet been diagnosed as having it; (ii) inhibiting the disease, disorder or condition, i.e., arresting its development; and (iii) relieving the disease, disorder or condition, i.e., causing regression of the disease, disorder and/or condition.
The term "substituted" as used herein includes substitution at from one to the maximum number of possible binding sites on the core, e.p., organic radical, to which the subsitutent is bonded, e.g., mono-, di-, tri- or tetra- substituted, unless otherwise specifically stated.
The nomenclature used to describe organic radicals, e.g., hydrocarbons and substituted hydrocarbons, generally follows standard nomenclature known in the art, unless otherwise specifically defined. Combinations of groups, e.g., alkylalkoxyamine or arylalkyl, include all possible stable configurations, unless otherwise specifically stated. Certain radicals and combinations are defined below for purposes of illustration.
The term "halo" as used herein means a halogen substituent selected from bromo, chloro, fluoro or iodo. The term "haloalkyl" means an alkyl group that in substituted with one or more halo substituents. T'he term "alkyl" as used herein means acyclic, straight or branched chain alkyl substituents having the specified number of carbon atoms and includes, for example, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, tert-butyl, hexyl, 1-methylethyl, 1- methylpropyl, 2-methypropyl, 1,1-dimethylethyl. Thus, C1-6 alkyl refers to an alkyl group having from one to six carbon atoms. The term "lower alkyl" means an alkyl group having from one to six, preferably from one to four carbon atoms. The term "alkylester" means an alkyl group additionally containing on ester group. Generally, a stated carbon number range, e.g., C2-6 alkylester, includes all of the carbon atoms in the radical.
The term "alkenyl" as used herein means an alkyl radical containing at least one double bond, e.g., ethenyl (vinyl) and alkyl.
The term "alkoxy" as used herein means an alkyl group with the indicated number of carbon atoms attached to an oxygen atom. Alkoxy includes, for example, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, 1-methylethoxy, butoxy and 1,1-dimethylethoxy. The latter radical is referred to in the art as tert-butoxy. The term "alkoxycarbonyl" means an alkoxy group additionally containing a carbonyl group.
The term "cycloalkyl" as used herein means a cycloalkyl substituent containing the indicated number of carbon atoms and includes, for example, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl and spiro cyclic groups such as spirocyclopropyl as spirocyclobutyl. The term "cycloalkoxy" as used herein means a cycloalkyl group linked to an oxygen atom, such as, for example, cyclobutyloxy or cyclopropyloxy. The term "alkylcycloalkyl" means a cycloalkyl group linked to an alkyl group. The stated carbon number range includes the total number of carbons in the radical, unless otherwise specifically stated. This a C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl may contain from 1-7 carbon atoms in the alkyl group and from 3-9 carbon atoms in the ring, e.g., cyclopropylmethyl or cyclohexylethyl.
The term "aryl" as used herein means an aromatic moiety containing the indicated number of carbon atoms, such as, but not limited to phenyl, indanyl or naphthyl. For example, C6-10 aryl refers to an aromatic moiety having from six to ten carbon atoms which may be in the form of a monocyclic or bicyclic structure. The term "haloaryl" as used herein refers to an aryl mono, di or tri substituted with one or more halogen atoms. The terms "alkylaryl", "arylalkyl" and "aralalkyl" mean an aryl group substituted with one or more alkyl groups. Unless the carbon range of each group is specified, the stated range applies to the entire substituent. Thus, a C7-1 alkylaryl group many have from 1-8 carbon atoms in the alkyl group for a monocyclic aromatic and from 1-4 carbon atoms in the alkyl group for a fused aromatic. The attachment of the group to bonding site on the molecule can be either at the aryl group or the alkyl group. Unless a specific aryl radical is specified, e.g., fluoro-phenyl, or the radical is stated to be unsubstituted, the aryl radicals include those substituted with typical substituents known to those skilled in the art, e.g., halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, carbonyl, nitro, sulfo, amino, cyano, dialkylamino haloalkyl, CF3, haloalkoxy, thioalkyl, alkanoyl, SH, alkylamino, alkylamide, dialkylamide, carboxyester, alkylsulfone, alkylsulfonamide and alkyl(alkoxy)amine. Examples of alkylaryl groups include benzyl, butylphenyl and 1 -naphthylmethyl.
The term "alkanoyl" as used herein means straight or branched 1-oxoalkyl radicals containing the indicated number of carbon atoms and includes, for example, formyl, acetyl, 1-oxopropyl (propionyl), 2-methyl-l-oxopropyl, 1-oxohexyl and the like.
The term "alkylamide" as used herein means an amide mono-substituted with an alkyl, such as
Figure imgf000014_0001
The term "heterocycle" , also referred to as "Het", as used herein means 7-12 membered bicyclic heterocycles and 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycles. Preferred bicyclic heterocycles are 7-12 membered fused bicyclic ring systems (both rings share an adjacent pair of atoms) containing from one to four heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, wherein both rings of the heterocycle are fully unsaturated. The nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms atoms may be optionally oxidized. The bicyclic heterocycle may contain the heteroatoms in one or both rings. Unless a specific heterocycle is specified, e.g., a fluorinated 7-12 membered bicyclic heterocycle, or the heterocycle is stated to be unsubstituted, the heterocycles include those substituted with typical substituents known to those skilled in the art. For example, the bicyclic heterocycle may also contain substituents on any of the ring carbon atoms, e.g., one to three substituents. Examples of suitable substituents include Ci-6 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C3-7 cycloalkoxy, halo-Ci- β alkyl, CF3, mono-or di- halo-C1-6 alkoxy, cyano, halo, thioalkyl, hydroxy, alkanoyl, NO2, SH, , amino, C1-6 alkylamino, di (Ci-6) alkylamino, di (Ct-6) alkylamide, carboxyl, (Ci-6) carboxyester, C1-6alkylsulfone, C1-6alkylsulfonamide, C1-6 alkylsulfoxide, di (Cι-6) alkyl(alkoxy)amine, C6-10 aryl, C7-14 alkylaryl, and a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle. When two substituents are attached to vicinal carbon atoms of the bicyclic heterocycle, they can join to form a ring, e.g., a five, six or seven membered ring system containing up to two heteroatoms selecting from oxygen and nitrogen. The bicyclic heterocycle may be attached to the molecule, e.g. Ri in formula I, at any atom in the ring and preferably carbon.
Examples of bicyclic heterocycles include, but are not limited to, the following ring systems:
Figure imgf000015_0001
Preferred monocyclic heterocycles are 5-7 membered saturated, partially saturated or fully unsaturated ring system (this latter subset also herein referred to as unsaturated heteroaromatic) containing in the ring from one to four heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, wherein the sulfur and nitrogen heteroatoms may be optionally oxidized. Unless a specific heterocycle is specified, e.g., a C1-6 alkoxy substituted 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle, or the heterocycle is stated to be unsubstituted, the heterocycles include those substituted with typical substituents known to those skilled in the art. For example, the monocyclic heterocycle may also contain substituents on any of the ring atoms, e.g., one to three substituents. Examples of suitable substituents include C1-6 alkyl, C3- cycloalkyl, Cι_6 alkoxy, C3-7 cycloalkoxy, halo- -ό alkyl, CF3, mono-or di- halo-Cι-6 alkoxy, cyano, halo, thioalkyl, hydroxy, alkanoyl, NO , SH, , amino, C1-6 alkylamino, di (Ci-6) alkylamino, di (Cι.-6) alkylamide, carboxyl, (C].-6) carboxyester, Ci_6 alkylsulfone, Ci-6 alkylsulfoxide, Cι-6 alkylsulfonamide, di (Cι-6) alkyl(alkoxy)amine, Cβ-io aryl, C -14 alkylaryl and an additional 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle. The monocyclic heterocycle may be attached to the molecule, e.g. Ri in formula I, at any atom in the ring.
Examples of monocyclic heterocycles include, but are not limited to, the following (and their tautomers):
Figure imgf000016_0001
-S rr"> „-N
0 O Q X- l C" O-
Figure imgf000016_0002
Those skilled in the art will recognize that the heterocycles used in the compounds of the present invention should be stable. Generally, stable compounds are those which can be synthesized, isolated and formulated using techniques known the those skilled in the art without degradation of the compound.
The term "substituent" with reference to an amino acid or amino acid derivative means a radical derived from the corresponding -amino acid. For instance, the substituents methyl, iso-propyl, and phenyl represent the amino acids alanine, valine, and phenyl glycine, respectively.
Where used in naming compounds of the present invention, the designations "PI', PI, P2, P3 and P4", as used herein, map the relative positions of the amino acid residues of a protease inhibitor binding relative to the binding of the natural peptide cleavage substrate. Cleavage occurs in the natural substrate between PI and PI' where the nonprime positions designate amino acids starting from the C-terminus end of the peptide natural cleavage site extending towards the N-terminus; whereas, the prime positions emanate from the N-terminus end of the cleavage site designation and extend towards the C-terminus. For example, PI' refers to the first position away from the right hand end of the C-terminus of the cleavage site (ie. N-terminus first position); whereas PI starts the numbering from the left hand side of the C-terminus cleavage site, P2: second position from the C-temiinus, etc.)(see Berger A. & Schechter I., Transactions of the Royal Society London series (1970), B257, 249-264].
Thus in the compounds of formula I, the "PI' to P4" portions of the molecule are indicated below:
Figure imgf000017_0001
As used herein the term "1-aminocyclopropyl-carboxylic acid" (Acca) refers to a compound of formula:
Figure imgf000018_0001
As used herein the term "tert-butylglycine" refers to a compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000018_0002
The term "residue" with reference to an amino acid or amino acid derivative means a radical derived from the corresponding α-amino acid by eliminating the hydroxyl of the carboxy group and one hydrogen of the α-amino acid group. For instance, the terms Gin, Ala, Gly, He, Arg, Asp, Phe, Ser, Leu, Cys, Asn, Sar and Tyr represent the "residues" of -glutamine, X-alanine, glycine, Z-isoleucine, Z-arginine, L-aspartic acid, £-phenylalanine, L-serine, i-leucine, L-cysteine, Z-asparagine, sarcosine and Z-tyrosine, respectively.
The term "side chain" with reference to an amino acid or amino acid residue means a group attached to the α-carbon atom of the α-amino acid. For example, the R-group side chain for glycine is hydrogen, for alanine it is methyl, for valine it is isopropyl. For the specific R-groups or side chains of the α-amino acids reference is made to A.L. Lehninger's text on Biochemistry (see chapter 4).
The compounds of the present invention have the structure of Formula I:
Figure imgf000019_0001
(a) Ri and R2 are each independently C1-8 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl C4-io alkylcycloalkyl, C1- alkoxy, C6-10 aryl, C -ι4 alkylaryl, C9-1 cycloalkylaryl, C7-14 alkoxyaryl, C -ι cycloalkoxyaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C -14 alkylheteroaryl; or Ri and R2, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 4-8 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
(b) m is 1 or 2; (c) n is 1 or 2;
(d) R3 is H; or C1-6 alkyl, C -6 alkenyl or C3-7 cycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with halogen;
(e) t is C1-8 alkyl optionally substituted with halo, cyano, amino, C1-6 dialkylamino, C6-10 aryl, C7-14 alkylaryl, C1-6 alkoxy, carboxy, hydroxy, aryloxy, C7-14 alkylaryloxy, C2-6 alkylester or Cg-is alkylarylester; C3-12 alkenyl; C3-7 cycloalkyl or C4-ιo alkylcycloalkyl, wherein the cycloalkyl or alkylcycloalkyl are optionally substituted with hydroxy, C1-6 alkyl, C -6 alkenyl or C1-6 alkoxy; or R3 together with the carbon atom to which it is attached forms a C3.7 cycloalkyl group optionally substituted with C2-6 alkenyl;
(f) Y is H, phenyl substituted with nitro, pyridyl substituted with nitro, or C1.6 alkyl optionally substituted with cyano, hydroxyl or C3_7 cycloalkyl; provided that if R5 or Re is H then Y is H;
(g) B is H, Ci-6 alkyl, R5-(C=O)-, R5O(C=O)-, R5-N(R6)-C(=0)-, R5-N(R6)-C(=S)-, R5SO2-, or R5-N(R6)-SO2-;
(h) R5 is (i) Ci_ιo alkyl optionally substituted with phenyl, carboxyl, Cι-6 alkanoyl, 1-3 halogen, hydroxy, -OC(O)Ci_6 alkyl, C^ alkoxy, amino optionally substituted with Cι-6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amido; (ii) C3- cycloalkyl, C3-7 cycloalkoxy, or C4-1o alkylcycloalk yl, each optionally substituted with hydroxy, carboxyl, (Cι_6 alkoxy)carbonyl, ammo optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amido; (iii) C6-10 aryl or C -16 arylalkyl, each optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, halogen, nitro, hydroxy, amido, (lower alkyl) amido, or amino optionally substituted with Ci-6 alkyl; (iv) Het; (v) bicyclo(l.l.l)pentane; or (vi) -C(O)OC1-6 alkyl, C2_6alkenyl or C2-6 alkynyl; (i) R6 is H; C1-6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 halogens; or C1-6 alkoxy provided R5 is Cj.io alkyl; (j) X is O, S, SO, SO2, OCH2, CH2O or NH;
(k) R is Het, C6-10 aryl or C7-14 alkylaryl, each optionally substituted with Ra; and (1) Ra is Ci-6 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, Cι-6 alkoxy, C3-7 cycloalkoxy, halo-Ci- β alkyl, CF3, mono-or di- halo-C1-6 alkoxy, cyano, halo, thioalkyl, hydroxy, alkanoyl, NO2, SH, , amino, C1-6 alkylamino, di (Ci-6) alkylamino, di (Cι-6) alkylamide, carboxyl, (Ci-6) carboxyester, C1-6 alkylsulfone, C1-6 alkylsulfonamide, di (Ci-6) alkyl(alkoxy) mine, C6_ 10 aryl, C -14 alkylaryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof.
Preferably, Ri, and R are each independently C1-8 alkyl, C3- cycloalkyl, C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C6-10 aryl, C7-14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C7-14 alkylheteroaryl; or Ri and R2, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 4-8 membered monocyclic heterocycle. More preferably, Ri and R2 are each independently C1-8 alkyl, C4-1o alkylcycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C6-1o aryl, C7-14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C7-14 alkylheteroaryl, or Ri and R2, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 5-6 membered monocyclic heterocycle. Preferably, R3 is C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl or C3-7 cycloalkyl. More preferably, R3 is C2-6 alkenyl.
Preferably, R4 is C1-8 alkyl optionally substituted with C6 aryl, C^g alkoxy, carboxy, hydroxy, aryloxy, C7-14 alkylaryloxy, C2-6 alkylester or C8-15 alkylarylester; C3-12 alkenyl; C3-7 cycloalkyl; or C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl. More preferably, R is Ci-8 alkyl optionally substituted with C1-6 alkoxy; or C3- cycloalkyl. '
Preferably, Y is H.
Preferably, B is H, Cι-6 alkyl, R5-(C*=O)-, R5O(C*=O)-, R5-N(R6)-C(*=O)-, R5-N(R6)-C(=S)-, R5SO2-, or R5-N(R6)-SO2-. More preferably, B is R5-(C=O)-, R5O(C=O)-, or R5-N(R6)-C(*=O)-. Even more preferably, B is R5O(C=O)- and R5 is Cι-6 alkyl.
Preferably, R5 is (i) C1-:LO alkyl optionally substituted with phenyl, carboxyl, C1- alkanoyl, 1-3 halogen, hydroxy, C1-6 alkoxy; (ii) C3.7 cycloalkyl, C3-7 cycloalkoxy, or C4-10 alkylcycloalklyl; or (iii) C6-ι0 aryl or C7-16 arylalkyl, each optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl or halogen. More preferably, R5 is (i) C1-10 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 halogen or C1-6 alkoxy; or (ii) C3- cycloalkyl or C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl.
Preferably, R6 is H or Cι-6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 halogens. More preferably, R6 is H.
Preferably, X is O or NH.
Preferably, R' is Het; or C6-10 aryl optionally substituted with Ra. More preferably, R' is Het. Even more preferably, the heterocycle contains 1 or 2 nitrogen atoms and optionally a sulfur atom or an oxygen atom in the ring. Preferably, the heterocycle is substituted with at least one of Cι-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, halo, C6-io aryl, C7-14 alkylaryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle. Preferably, Rais Cι-6 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, halo-Cr6 alkyl, halo, amino, C6 aryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
In a prefered aspect of the invention, there is provided a compound having the formula
Figure imgf000022_0001
wherein: (a) Ri and R2 are each independently C1-8 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, C -1o alkylcycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C6-1o aryl, C7-14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl, C7-14 alkylheteroaryl, or Ri and R , together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 4-8 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
(b) m is 1 or 2; (c) n is 1 or 2;
(d) R3 is Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl or C3- cycloalkyl; (e) R4 is C1-8 alkyl optionally substituted with C6 aryl, C1-6 alkoxy, carboxy, hydroxy, aryloxy, C7-14 alkylaryloxy, C2-6 alkylester, C8-15 alkylarylester; C3-12 alkenyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, or C4-1o alkylcycloalkyl;
(f) B is H, C1-6 alkyl, R5-(C=O)-, R5O(C=O)-5 R5-N(R6)-C(=O)-,
R5-N(R6)-C(=S)-, R5SO2-, or R5-N(R6)-SO2-;
(g) R5 is (i) CMO alkyl optionally substituted with phenyl, carboxyl, Cι-6 alkanoyl, 1-3 halogen, hydroxy, C1-6 alkoxy; (ii) C3- cycloalkyl, C3- cycloalkoxy, or C4-1o alkylcycloalklyl; or (iii) C -10 aryl or C7-1 arylalkyl, each optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl or halogen; (h) R6 is H or Cι-6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 halogens;
(i) X is O or NH;
(j) R' is Het; or C6-10 aryl optionally substituted with Ra; and
(k) Ra is Ci-6 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, halo-Ci-6 alkyl, halo, amino, C6 aryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof.
Preferably, Ri and R2 are each independently C1-8 alkyl, C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, C6-10 aryl, C7-14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl, C -14 alkylheteroaryl, or Ri and R2, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 5-6 membered monocyclic heterocycle More preferably, Ri and R2 are each independently C1-3 alkyl or C1-3 alkoxy.
Preferably, R' is a bicyclic heterocycle. More preferably, the heterocycle contains 1 or 2 nitrogen atoms and optionally a sulfur atom or an oxygen atom in the ring. Preferably, the heterocycle is substituted with at least one of C1-6 alkyl, Cι-6 alkoxy, halo, C6 aryl, and a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle. Even more preferably, R' is a bicyclic heterocycle containing 1 nitrogen atom and substituted with methoxy and at least one of a C aryl and a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
In another prefered aspect, R' is a monocyclic heterocycle. Preferably, the heterocycle contains 1 or 2 nitrogen atoms and optionally a sulfur atom or an oxygen atom in the ring. More preferably, the heterocycle is substituted with at least one of C1-6 alkyl, C1- alkoxy, halo, C -10 aryl, C7-14 alkylaryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle. Preferably, R' is a monoyclic heterocycle containing 1 or 2 nitrogen atoms and substituted with methoxy and at least one of a C6 aryl and a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
In another prefered aspect of the invention, there is provided a compound having the formula
Figure imgf000024_0001
wherein:
(a) Ri and R2 are each independently Cι-8 alkyl, C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C6-ιo aryl, C7-14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C7-14 alkylheteroaryl; or Ri and R2, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 5-6 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
(b) m is 1 or 2; (c) n is i or 2;
(d) R3 is C2-6 alkenyl;
(e) i is C1-8 alkyl;
(f) B is R5O(C=O)-, or R5-NH-C(=O)-;
(g) R5 is Ci-io alkyl; (h) R' is a bicyclic heterocycle optionally substituted with R ; and
(i) Ra is C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, halo, C6 aryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof.
Preferably, Ri and R2 are each independently C1-3 alkyl, or C1-3 alkoxy. More preferably, Ri is methyl. Preferably, R2 is methyl or methoxy. Preferably, R3 is vinyl. Preferably, R is t-butyl. Preferably, R5 is t-butyl. Preferably, R' is quinoline or isoquinoline optionally substituted with Ra.
Preferably, Ri is methyl, R2 is methoxy, R3 is vinyl, R4 is t-butyl, R5 is t- butyl, and R' is isoquinoline substituted with at least one Ra. Preferably, Ra is Cι-6 alkoxy. More preferably, Ra further includes at least one of C6 aryl or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
The compounds of the present invention, which contain a basic moiety, can form salts by the addition of a pharmaceutically acceptable acid. The acid addition salts are formed from a compound of Formula I and a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic acid, including but not limited to hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, sulfuric, phosphoric, or organic acid such as *-toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, acetic, benzoic, citric, malonic, fumaric, maleic, oxalic, succinic, sulfamic, or tartaric. Thus, examples of such pharmaceutically acceptable salts include chloride, bromide, iodide, sulfate, phosphate, methanesulfonate, citrate, acetate, malonate, fumarate, sulfamate, and tartrate.
Salts of an amine group may also comprise quaternary ammonium salts in which the amino nitrogen carries a suitable organic group such as an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl or aralkyl moiety.
Compounds of the present invention, which are substituted with an acidic group, may exist as salts formed through base addition. Such base addition salts include those derived from inorganic bases which include, for example, alkali metal salts (e.g. sodium and potassium), alkaline earth metal salts (e.g. calcium and magnesium), aluminum salts and ammonium salts. In addition, suitable base addition salts include salts of physiologically acceptable organic bases such as trimethylamine, triethylamine, morpholine, pyridine, piperidine, picoline, dicyclohexylamine, N,N'-dibenzylethylenediamine, 2-hydroxyethylamine, bis-(2-hydroxyethyl)amine, tri-(2-hydroxyethyl)amine, procaine, dibenzylpiperidine, N-benzyl-β-phenethylamine, dehydroabietylamine, N,N'-bishydroabietylamine, glucamine, N-methylglucamine, collidine, quinine, quinoline, ethylenediamine, omithine, choline, N,N'-benzylphenethylamine, chloroprocaine, diethanolamine, diethylamine, piperazine, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane and tetramethylammonium hydroxide and basic amino acids such as lysine, arginine and N-methylglutamine. These salts may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art. Certain compounds of the present invention, and their salts, may also exist in the form of solvates with water, for example hydrates, or with organic solvents such as methanol, ethanol or acetonitrile to form, respectively, a methanolate, ethanolate or acetonitrilate. The present invention includes each solvate and nrixtures thereof.
In addition, compounds of the present invention, or a salt or solvate thereof, may exhibit polymorphism. The present invention also encompasses any such polymorphic form.
The compounds of the present invention also contain two or more chiral centers. For example, the compounds may include PI cyclopropyl element of formula
Figure imgf000026_0001
PI
wherein and C2 each represent an asymmetric carbon atom at positions 1 and 2 of the cyclopropyl ring. Not withstanding other possible asymmetric centers at other segments of the compounds, the presence of these two asymmetric centers means that the compounds can exist as racemic mixtures of diastereomers, such as the diastereomers wherein R2 is configured either syn to the amide or syn to the carbonyl as shown below.
Figure imgf000027_0001
(1R,2S) (1S'2R)
R2 is syn to carbonyl R2 is syn to carbonyl
Figure imgf000027_0002
(1R, 2R) (IS, 2S)
R2 is syn to amide R2 is syn to amide
The present invention includes both enantiomers and mixtures of enantiomers such as racemic mixtures.
The enantiomers may be resolved by methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, by formation of diastereoisomeric salts which may be separated by crystallization, gas-liquid or liquid chromatography, selective reaction of one enantiomer with an enantiomer-specific reagent. It will be appreciated that where the desired enantiomer is converted into another chemical entity by a separation technique, then an additional step is required to form the desired enantiomeric form. Alternatively, specific enantiomers may be synthesized by asymmetric synthesis using optically active reagents, substrates, catalysts or solvents, or by converting one enantiomer into the other by asymmetric transformation.
The compounds of the present invention may be in the form of a prodrug. Simple aliphatic or aromatic esters derived from, when present, acidic groups pendent on the compounds of this invention are preferred prodrugs. In some cases it is desirable to prepare double ester type prodrugs such as (acyloxy) alkyl esters or (alkoxycarbonyl)oxy)alkyl esters.
Certain compounds of the present invention may also exist in different stable conformational forms which may be separable. Torsional asymmetry due to restricted rotation about an asymmetric single bond, for example because of steric hindrance or ring strain, may permit separation of different conformers. The present invention includes each conformational isomer of these compounds and mixtures thereof.
Certain compounds of the present invention may exist in zwitterionic form and the present invention includes each zwitterionic form of these compounds and mixtures thereof.
The starting materials useful to synthesize the compounds of the present invention are known to those skilled in the art and can be readily manufactured or are commercially available.
The compounds of the present invention can be manufactured by methods known to those skilled in the art, see e.g., US Patent No. 6,323,180 and US Patent Application Publication No. 20020111313 Al , published August 15, 2002. The following methods set forth below are provided for illustrative purposes and are not intended to limit the scope of the claimed invention. It will be recognized that it may be preferred or necessary to prepare such a compound in which a functional group is protected using a conventional protecting group then to remove the protecting group to provide a compound of the present invention. The details concerning the use of protecting groups in accordance with the present invention are known to those skilled in the art.
The compounds of the present invention may, for example, be synthesized according to a general process as illustrated in Scheme I (wherein CPG is a carboxyl protecting group and APG is an amino protecting group): Scheme I
PI Pl-CPG + APG-P2 APG-P2-P1-CPG
Figure imgf000029_0001
APG-P3-P2-P1-CPG P2-P1-CPG + APG-P3
Figure imgf000029_0002
B-P3-P2-P1 B-P3-P2-P1-P1'
Briefly, the PI, P2, and P3 can be linked by well known peptide coupling techniques. The PI, P2, and P3 groups may be linked together in any order as long as the final compound corresponds to peptides of the invention. For example, P3 can be linked to P2-P1 ; or PI linked to P3-P2.
Generally, peptides are elongated by deprotecting the α-amino group of the N-terminal residue and coupling the unprotected carboxyl group of the next suitably N-protected amino acid through a peptide linkage using the methods described. This deprotection and coupling procedure is repeated until the desired sequence is obtained. This coupling can be performed with the constituent amino acids in stepwise fashion, as depicted in Scheme I.
Coupling between two amino acids, an amino acid and a peptide, or two peptide fragments can be carried out using standard coupling procedures such as the azide method, mixed carbonic-carboxylic acid anhydride (isobutyl chloroformate) method, carbodiimide (dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, diisopropylcarbodiimide, or water-soluble carbodiimide) method, active ester (p-nitrophenyl ester, iV-hydroxysuccinic imido ester) method, Woodward reagent K-method, carbonyldiimidazole method, phosphorus reagents or oxidation-reduction methods. Some of these methods (especially the carbodiimide method) can be enhanced by adding 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole or 4-DMAP. These coupling reactions can be performed in either solution (liquid phase) or solid phase.
More explicitly, the coupling step involves the dehydrative coupling of a free carboxyl of one reactant with the free amino group of the other reactant in the present of a coupling agent to form a linking amide bond. Descriptions of such coupling agents are found in general textbooks on peptide chemistry, for example, M. Bodanszky, "Peptide Chemistry", 2nd rev ed., Springer- Verlag, Berlin, Germany, (1993). Examples of suitable coupling agents are N,N'-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole in the presence of N,N'-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide or N-ethyl-N'-[(3-dimethylamino)propyl]carbodiimide. A practical and useful coupling agent is the commercially available (benzotriazol- 1 -yloxy)tris-(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate, either by itself or in the present of 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole or 4-DMAP. Another practical and useful coupling agent is commercially available 2-(lH-benzotriazol-l-yl)-N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate. Still another practical and useful coupling agent is commercially available O-(7-azabenzotrizol-l-yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate. The coupling reaction is conducted in an inert solvent, e.g. dichloromethane, acetonitrile or dimethylformamide. An excess of a tertiary amine, e.g. diisopropylethylamine, N-methylmorpholine, N-methylpyrrolidine or 4-DMAP is added to maintain the reaction mixture at a pH of about 8. The reaction temperature usually ranges between 0 °C and 50 °C and the reaction time usually ranges between 15 min and 24 h.
The functional groups of the constituent amino acids generally must be protected during the coupling reactions to avoid formation of undesired bonds. Protecting groups that can be used are listed, for example, in Greene, "Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry", John Wiley & Sons, New York (1981) and "The
Peptides: Analysis, Synthesis, Biology", Vol. 3, Academic Press, New York (1981), the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference. The α-amino group of each amino acid to be coupled to the growing peptide chain must be protected (APG). Any protecting group known in the art can be used. Examples of such groups include: 1) acyl groups such as formyl, trifluoroacetyl, phthalyl, and p-toluenesulfonyl; 2) aromatic carbamate groups such as benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz or Z) and substituted bensyloxycarbonyls, and
9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (F oc); 3) aliphatic carbamate groups such as tert-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc), ethoxycarbonyl, diisopropylmethoxycarbonyl, and allyloxycarbonyl; 4) cyclic alkyl carbamate groups such as cyclopentyloxycarbonyl and adamantyloxycarbonyl; 5) alkyl groups such as triphenyhnethyl and benzyl; 6)trialkylsilyl such as trimethylsilyl; and 7) thiol containing groups such as phenylthiocarbonyl and dithiasuccinoyl.
The preferred α-amino protecting group is either Boc or Fmoc. Many amino acid derivatives suitably protected for peptide synthesis are commercially available. The α-amino protecting group of the newly added amino acid residue is cleaved prior to the coupling of the next amino acid. When the Boc group is used, the methods of choice are trifluoroacetic acid, neat or in dichloromethane, or HC1 in dioxane or in ethyl acetate. The resulting ammonium salt is then neutralized either prior to the coupling or in situ with basic solutions such as aqueous buffers, or tertiary amines in dichloromethane or acetonitrile or dimethylformamide. When the Fmoc group is used, the reagents of choice are piperidine or substituted piperidine in dimethylformamide, but any secondary amine can be used. The deprotection is carried out at a temperature between 0°C and room temperature (rt or RT) usually 20-22°C.
Any of the amino acids having side chain functionalities must be protected during the preparation of the peptide using any of the above-described groups. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the selection and use of appropriate protecting groups for these side chain functionalities depend upon the amino acid and presence of other protecting groups in the peptide. The selection of such protecting groups is important in that the group must not be removed during the deprotection and coupling of the α-amino group. For example, when Boc is used as the α-amino protecting group, the following side chain protecting group are suitable: /--toluenesulfonyl (tosyl) moieties can be used to protect the amino side chain of amino acids such as Lys and Arg; acetamidomethyl, benzyl (Bn), or tert-butylsulfonyl moieties can be used to protect the sulfide containing side chain of cysteine; bencyl (Bn) ethers can be used to protect the hydroxy containing side chains of serine, threonine or hydroxyproline; and benzyl esters can be used to protect the carboxy containing side chains of aspartic acid and glutamic acid.
When Fmoc is chosen for the α-amine protection, usually tert-butyl based protecting groups are acceptable. For instance, Boc can be used for lysine and arginine, tert-butyl ether for serine, tlireonine and hydroxyproline, and tert-butyl ester for aspartic acid and glutamic acid. Triphenylmethyl (Trityl) moiety can be used to protect the sulfide containing side chain of cysteine.
Once the elongation of the peptide is completed all of the protecting groups are removed. When a liquid phase synthesis is used, the protecting groups are removed in whatever manner is dictated by the choice of protecting groups. These procedures are well known to those skilled in the art.
Further, the following guidance may be followed in the preparation of compounds of the present invention. For example, to form a compound where P - O)-, R4-S(O)2„ a protected P3 or the whole peptide or a peptide segment is coupled to an appropriate acyl chloride or sulfonyl chloride respectively, that is either commercially available or for which the synthesis is well known in the art.
In preparing a compound where R4O-C(O)-, a protected P3 or the whole peptide or a peptide segment is coupled to an appropriate chloroformate that is either commercially available or for which the synthesis is well known in the art. For Boc-derivatives (Boc)2O is used. For example:
Figure imgf000033_0001
Cyclopentanol is treated with phosgene to furnish the corresponding chlorofonnate.
The chloroformate is treated with the desired NH2-tripeptide in the presence of a base such as triethylamine to afford the cyclopentylcarbamate.
In preparing a compound where R4-N(R5)-C(O)-, or R4-NH-C(S)-, a protected P3 or the whole peptide or a peptide segment is treated with phosgene followed by amine as described in SynLett. Feb 1995; (2); 142-144 or is reacted with the commercially available isocyanate and a suitable base such as triethylamine.
In preparing a compound where R4-N(R5)-S(O2), a protected P3 or the whole peptide or a peptide segment is treated with either a freshly prepared or commercially available sulfamyl chloride followed by amine as described in patent Ger. Offen.(1998), 84 pp. DE 19802350 or WO 98/32748.
The α-carboxyl group of the C-terminal residue is usually protected as an ester (CPG) that can be cleaved to give the carboxylic acid. Protecting groups that can be used include: 1) alkyl esters such as methyl, trimethylsilylethyl and t-butyl, 2) aralkyl esters such as benzyl and substituted benzyl, or 3) esters that can be cleaved by mild base treatment or mild reductive means such as trichloroethyl and phenacyl esters. The resulting α-carboxylic acid (resulting from cleavage by mild acid, mild base treatment or mild reductive means) is coupled with a Ri(R )NSO2NH2 [prepared by described herein] in the presence of peptide coupling agent such as CDI in the presence of abase such as LiHMDS (lithium bis-hexamethyldisilylamide) to incorporate the PI' moiety, effectively assembling the tripeptide P1'-P1-P2-P3-APG.
Scheme II further shows the general process wherein compounds of Formula I are constructed by the coupling of tripeptide carboxylic acid intermediate (1) with a PL sulfamide. (It should be noted that the groups R6, R ; R8; R9> R10; Ru as shown below represent substituents of the heterocyclic system.) Said coupling reaction requires treatment of carboxylic acid (1) with a coupling reagent such as carbonyl diimidazole in a solvent such as THF, which can be heated to reflux, followed by the addition of the formed derivative of (1), to the PL sulfamide, in a solvent such as THF or methylene chloride in the presence of a base such as lithium bishexamethyldisilylamide.
Scheme II
P1*
Process P4-P3-P2-P1 P4-P3-P2-P1-P1*
Figure imgf000034_0001
An alternative process for the construction of compounds of Fonnula I is shown in Scheme III. Therein the PL sulfamide element is coupled to the PI element using the process employed in Scheme II. The resulting PI -PL moiety can then be deprotected at it's amino terminus. In this general example a Boc protecting group is employed but one skilled in the art would recognize that a number of suitable amino protecting groups could be employed in this process. Said Boc protecting group can be removed using acid such as trifluoroacetic acid in a solvent such as dichloroethane to provide the deprotected amine as the TFA salt. Said TFA amine salt can be directly employed in the subsequent coupling reaction or as an alternative the TFA amine salt can be first converted to the HC1 amine salt, and this HC1 amine salt is used in said coupling reaction as shown in Scheme III. The coupling of said HC1 amine salt (3) with the carboxyl terminus a P4-P3-P2 intermediate can be achieved using coupling reagents, such as HATU, in solvents such as dichloromethane to provide compounds of Formula I (4).
Scheme III
Process P1 P1' . P1-P1" P4-P3-P2 r P4-P3-P2-P1-P1"
Figure imgf000035_0001
\ 0 Compounds fo Formula I
An alternative process for the construction of compounds of Formula I is shown in Scheme TV. Herein the hydrochloride salt of the Pl-PT terminal amine (1) is coupled to the free carboxyl group of the P2 element using coupling agents such as PyBOP, in the presence of a base such as diisopropyl amine, and in a solvent such as
15 methylene chloride. The resulting P2-P 1 -P 1" intermediate can be converted to compounds of Formula I in a two step process wherein the first step is deprotection of the P2 amine terminus using an acid such as TFA in a solvent such as methylene chloride. The resulting trifluoroacetic acid salt can be coupled with the carboxyl teπninus of the P4-P3 element using standard coupling agents such as PyBop in the 0 presence of base such as diisopropyl amine, and using solvents such methylene chloride to provide compounds of Formula I (4). Scheme IV
Process P1-P1' P2 P4-P3
P2-P1-P1" P4-P3-P2-P1-P1"
Deprotection
Figure imgf000036_0001
Figure imgf000036_0002
The P4-P3-P2 intermediate utilized in the above schemes can be constructed as previously described with a further description of this process shown in general Scheme V. Therein the free carboxyl terminus of the P4-P3 intermediate (1), can be coupled to the amino terminus of the P2 element to provide the P4-P3-P2 dipeptide (2). The carboxyl terminus of the P4-P3-P2 intermediate can be deprotected by saponification of the ester group to provide P4-P3-P2 as the free carboxylic acid (3). Intermediates like (3) can be converted to compounds of Formula I using the methods described herein.
Scheme V
Figure imgf000036_0003
Compounds of Formula 1 can also be converted into other compounds of Formula I as described herein. An example of such a process is shown in Scheme VI wherein a compound of Formula I (1) which bears a Boc group at the P4 position is converted to a compound of Formula I (3) wherein said compound bears a urea group at the P4 position. The conversion of (1) to (3) can be carried out in a two step process the first of which is the conversion of (1) to amine (2) by treatment of (1) with an acid such as TFA in a solvent such as methylene chloride. The resulting amine TFA salt can be treated with an isocyanate in the presence of one equivalent of base to provide a compound of Formula I (3) wherein the P3 moiety is capped with a urea. As previously noted one skilled in the art will recognize that intermediate (2) can be used as starting materials for the preparation of compounds of Formula I wherein the P3 group is capped with an amide or a sulfonamide, or thiourea, or a sulfamide. The construction of said compounds of Formula I can be achieved using standard conditions for the formation of said P4 functionalities from amines.3
Scheme VI
Process P4-P3-P2-P1-P1 -*- P3-P2-P1-P1" - P4-P3-P2-P1-P1*
Figure imgf000037_0001
Compounds fo Formula
In the construction of compounds of Formula I, the PL terminus is incorporated into the molecules using one of the general processes outlined above and described in more detail below. These PL sulfamides can be prepared in a two step process using chlororsulfonylisocyanate as starting material. Said isocynate can be hydrolyzed to the corresponding chlorosulfamoyl chloride by treatment with water in a solvent such as THF. The intermediate sulfamoylchloride upon treatment with an amine, in the presence of a base, provides the desired sulfamide derivatives.
< > H20 0 ,0 base O O
Cl NCO Cl NH2 0 N ^NH2
I1 k
HN— R2
The PI elements utilized in generating compounds of Formula I are in some cases commercially available, but are otherwise synthesized using the methods described herein and subsequently incorporated into compounds of Formula I using the methods described herein. The substituted PI cyclopropylamhio acids can be synthesized following the general process outline in Scheme VIII.
Treatment of commercially available or easily synthesized imine (1) with 1,4- dihalobutene (2) in presence of a base produces, provides the resulting imine (3). Acid hydrolysis of 3 then provides 4, which has an allyl substituent syn to the carboxyl group as a major product. The amine moiety of 4 can protected using a Boc group to provide the fully protected amino acid 5. This intermediate is a racemate which can be resolved by an enzymatic process wherein the ester moiety of 5 is cleaved by a protease to provide the corresponding carboxylic acid. Without being bound to any particular theory, it is believed that this reaction is selective in that one of the enantiomers undergoes the reaction at a much greater rate than its mirror image providing for a kinetic resolution of the intermediate racemate. In the examples cited herein, the more preferred stereoisomer for integration into compounds of Formula I is 5a which houses the (1R, 2S) stereochemistry, hi the presence of the enzyme, this enantiomer does not undergo ester cleavage and thereby this enantiomer 5 a is recovered from the reaction mixture. However, the less preferred enantiomer ,5b with houses the (IS, 2R) stereochemistry undergoes ester cleavage, i.e., hydrolysis, to provide the free acid 6. Upon completion of this reaction, the ester 5a can be separated from the acid product 6 by routine methods such as, for example, aqueous extraction methods or chromotography. Scheme TII
Figure imgf000039_0001
(4) (3) (Boc)20, Base
Figure imgf000039_0002
Procedures for making P2 intermediates and compounds of Formula I are shown in the Schemes below. It should be noted that in many cases reactions are depicted for only one position of an intermediate. However, it is to be understood that such reactions could be used to impart modifications to other positions within this intermediate. Moreover, said intermediates, reaction conditions and methods given in the specific examples are broadly applicable to compounds with other substitution patterns. The general Schemes outlined below are followed with examples herein. Both general and specific examples are non-limiting, as for example the isoquinoline nucleus is shown as part of the general scheme, Scheme IX, however, this pathway represents a viable process for the construction of alternate heterocycle substituents as replacements for the isoquinoline element, such as quinolines, or pyridines. Scheme IX
Figure imgf000040_0001
Scheme IX shows the coupling of an N-protected C4-hydroxyproline moiety with a heterocycle to form intermediate (4) and the subsequent modification of said intermediate (4) to a compound of Formula I by the process of peptide elongation as described herein. It should be noted that in the first step, that is the coupling of the C4-hydroxy proline group with the heteroaryl element, a base is employed. One skilled in the art would recognized that this coupling can be done using bases such as potassium tert-butoxide, or sodium hydride, in solvent such as DMF or DMSO or THF. This coupling to the isoquinoline ring system occurs at the Cl position (numbering for isoquinoline ring system shown in intermediate 2 of Scheme IX) and is directed by the chloro group which is displaced in this process. It should be noted that the alternative leaving groups can be utilized at this position such as a fluoro as shown in the Scheme. Said fluoro intermediates (3) are available from the corresponding chloro compound using literature procedures described herein. It should also be noted that the position of the leaving group (chloro or fluoro) in a given ring system can vary as shown in Scheme X, wherein the leaving group (fluoro in this example) is in the C6 position of the isoquinoline ring system of intermediate (2). Scheme X
Figure imgf000041_0001
It should be further noted that the position of the ring heteroatom(s) in intermediates like (2) of Scheme IX and Scheme X is also variable, as defined by the term heterocycle described herein. In Scheme X intermediate (2) can be coupled to a C4 hydroxy proline derivative to provide the P2 element (3). This Co-substituted isoquinoline derivative can be converted to compounds of Formula I using the methods described herein.
An alternative to the method described above for the coupling of the C4- hydroxyproline to aromatics and heteroaromatics, is provided in the Mitsunobu reaction as depicted in
Scheme XI
Figure imgf000041_0002
step 1 of Scheme XI. In this general reaction Scheme a C4-hydroxy proline derivative is coupled to a quinazoline ring system. This reaction makes use of reagents such as triphenylphosphine and DEAD (diethylazodicarboxylate) in aprotic solvents such as THF or dioxane and can be used for the formation of aryl and heteroaryl ethers. Note that in the course of this coupling reaction the stereochemistry of the C4 chiral center in the C4-hydroxyproline derivative is inverted and thereby it is necessary to use the C4-hydroxyproline derivative housing the (S) stereochemistry at the C4 position as starting material, (as shown in Scheme XI). It should be noted that numerous modifications and improvements of the Mitsunobu reaction have been described in the literature, the teachings of which are incorporated herein.
In a subset of examples herein, isoquinolines are incoφorated into the final compounds and specifically into the P2 region of said compounds. One skilled in the art would recognize that a number of general methods are available for the synthesis of isoquinolines. Moreoever, said isoquinolines generated by these methods can be readily incorporated into final compounds of Formula I using the processes described herein. One general methodology for the synthesis of isoquinolines is shown in Scheme XII, wherein cinnamic acid derivatives, shown in general form as structure (2) are
Scheme XII
Figure imgf000042_0001
Reference: N. Briet at al, Tetrahedron, 2002, 5761 converted to 1-chloroisoquinolines in a four step process. Said chloroisoquinolines can be subsequently used in coupling reactions to C4-hydroxyproline derivatives as described herein. The conversion of cinnamic acids to chloroquinolines begins with the treatment of cinnamic acid with an alkylcholorformate in the presence of a base. The resulting anhydride is then treated with sodium azide which results in the formation of an acylazide (3) as shown in the Scheme. Alternate methods are available for the formation of acylazides from carboxylic acids as for example said carboxylic acid can be treated with diphenylphosphorylazide (DPP A) in an aprotic solvent such as methylene chloride in the presence of a base. In the next step of the reaction sequence the acylazide (3) is coverted to the corresponding isoquinolone (4) as shown in the Scheme. In the event the acylazide is heated to a temperature of approximately 190 degress celcius in a high boiling solvent such a diphenylmethane. This reaction is general and provides moderate to good yields of substituted isoquinolone from the corresponding cinnamic acid derivatives. It should noted that said cinnamic acid derivatives are available commercially or can be obtained from the corresponding benzaldehyde (1) derivative by direct condensation with malonic acid or derivatives thereof and also by employing a Wittig reaction. The intermediate isoquinolones (4) of Scheme XII can be converted to the corresponding 1- chloroisoquinoline by treatment with phosphorous oxychloride. This reaction is general and can be applied to any of the isoquinolones, quinolones or additional heterocycles as shown herein to covert a hydroxy substituent to the corresponding chloro compound when said hydroxy is in conjugation with a nitrogen atom in said heterocylic ring systems.
An alternative method for the synthesis of the isoquinoline ring system is the Pomeranz-Fritsh procedure. This general method is outlined in Scheme XIII. The process begins with the conversion of a benzaldehyde derivative (1) to a functionalized imine (2). Said imine is then converted to the isoquinoline ring system by treatment with acid at elevated
Scheme XIII
Figure imgf000043_0001
Pomeranz-Fritsch synthesis
K. Hirao, R. Tsuchiya, Y. Yano, H. Tsue, Heterocycles 42(1) 1996, 415-422 temperature. This isoquinoline synthesis of Scheme XIII is general, and it should be noted that this process is particularly useful in procuring isoquinoline intermediates that are substituted at the C8 position (note: in intermediate (3) of Scheme XIII the C8 position of the isoquinoline ring is substituted with substutuent Rn). The intermediate isoquinolines (3) can be converted to the corresponding 1- chloroquinolines (5) in a two step process as shown. The first step in this sequence is the formation of the isoquinoline N-oxide(4) by treatment of isoquinoline (3) with meta-chloroperbenzoic acid in an aprotic solvent such as dichloromethane. Intermediate (4) can be converted to the corresponding 1-chloroquinoline by treatment with phosphorous oxychloroide in refluxing chloroform. Note this two step process is general and can be employed to procure chloroisoquinolines and chloroquinolines from the corresponding isoquinolines and quinolines respectively.
Another method for the synthesis of the isoquinoline ring system is shown in Scheme XIV. In this process an ortho-alkylbenzamide derivative (1) is treated with a strong
Scheme XIV
Figure imgf000044_0001
base such as tert-butyl lithium in a solvent such as THF at low temperature. To this reaction mixture is then added a nitrile derivative, which undergoes an addition reaction with the anion derived from deprotonation of (1), resulting in the formation of (2). This reaction is general and can be used for the formation of substituted isoquinolines. Intermediate (2) of Scheme XIV can be converted to the corresponding 1 -chloroquinoline by the methods described herein.
An additional method for the synthesis of isoquinolines is shown in Scheme XV. The deprotonation of intermediate (1) using tert-butyl lithium is described above. In the present method however, said intermediate anion is trapped by an ester, resulting in the formation of intermediate (2) as shown below. In a subsequent reaction ketone (2) is condensed with ammoniumn acetate at elevated temperature providing for the formation of quinolone (3). This reaction is general and can be applied for the construction of substituted isoquinolones which can then be converted to the corresponding 1-chloroisoquinolines as described herein.
Scheme XV
Figure imgf000045_0001
Yet an additional method for the construction of isoquinolines is found in Scheme XVI. In the first step of this process an ortho-alkylarylimine derivatives such as (1) is subjected to deprotonation conditions (sec-butyl lithium, THF) and the resulting anion is quenched by
Scheme XVI
Figure imgf000045_0002
L. Flippin, J. Muchowski, JOC, 1993, 2631-2632 the addition of an activated carboxylic acid derivative such as a Weinreb amide. The resulting keto imine (2) can be converted to the corresponding isoquinoline by condensation with ammom'um acetate at elevated temperatures. This method is general and can be used for the synthesis of substituted isoquinolines. Said isoquinolines can be converted to the corresponding 1-chloroquinoline by the methods described herein.
The heterocycles described herein, and which are incorporated into the compounds of Formula I can be further functionalized. One skilled in the art will recognize that additional functionalization of said heterocycles can be done either before or after incorporation of these functionalities into compounds of Formula I. The following Schemes illustrate this point. For example Scheme XVII shows the conversion of a 1-chloro-
Scheme XVII
Figure imgf000046_0001
6-fluoro-isoquinoline to the corresponding l-chloro-6-alkoxy-isoquinoline species, by treatment of (1) of (eq.l) with a sodium or potassium alkoxide species in the alcohol solvent from which the alkoxide is derived at room temperature. In some cases it may be necessary to heat the reaction to drive it to completion. Said chloroquinolhie can be incorporated into a compound of Formula I using the art described herein.
Modifications of a P2 heterocyclic element can also be done after it's incorporation into compounds of Formula I as shown in (eq.2) of Scheme VXII. Specifically compounds such as (1) in (eq. 2) which contain a leaving group in the pthalazine nucleus can be displaced by a nucleophile such as an alkoxide in solvents such as the corresponding alcohol from which the alkoxide is derived. These reaction scan be conducted at room temperature but in some cases it may be necessary to heat the reaction to drive it to completion.
Scheme XVIII provides a general example for the modification of heterocycles as defined herein by employing palladium mediated coupling reactions. Said couplings can be employed to functionalize a heterocycle at each position of the ring system providing said ring is suitably activated or functionalized, as for example with a chloride as shown in the Scheme. This sequence begins with 1- chloroisoquinoline (1) which upon treatment with metachloroperbenzoic acid can be converted to the corresponding N-oxide (2). Said intermediate (2) can be converted to the corresponding 1,3-dichloroisoquinoline (3) by treatment with phosphorous oxychloride in refluxing chloroform. Intermediate (3) can be coupled with N-Boc-4- hydroxyproline by the methods described herein to provide intermediate (5) as shown in the Scheme. Intermediate (5) can undergo a Suzuki coupling with an aryl boronic acid, in the presence of a palladium reagent and base, and in a solvent such as THF or toluene or DMF to provide the C3-arylisoquinoline intermediate (6). Heteroarylboronic acids can also be employed in this Pd mediated coupling process to provide C3-heteroarylisoquinolines. Intermediate (6) can be converted into final compounds of Formula I by the methods described herein.
Scheme XVIII
Figure imgf000047_0001
Palladium mediated couplings of heteroaryl systems with aryl or heteroaryl elements can also be employed at a later synthetic stage in the construction of compounds of Formula I as shown in Scheme LXX. Therein tripeptide acylsulfonamide intermediate (1) is coupled to a l-chloro-3-brornoisoquinoline (2) using the previously described process of alkoxide displacement of an heteroarylhalo moiety to provide intermediate (3). The coupling of (1) and (2) is most efficient in the presence of a catalyst such as lanthanum chloride as described herein. The isoquinoline ring system of intermediate (3) can be further functionalized by employing either Suzuki couplings (Process 1: subjecting (3) to heteroaryl or aryl boronic acids in the presence of a palladium catalyst such as palladium tetra(triphenylphosphine) and a base such as cesium carbonate in solvents such as DMF) or Stille couplings (Process 2: subjecting (3) to heteraryl or aryl tin dervatives in the presence of palladium catalyst such as palladium tetra(triphenylphosphine in solvents such as toluene).
Scheme IXX
Figure imgf000048_0001
Palladium reactions can also be employed to couple C4-arnino proline elements *with functionalized heterocycles. Scheme XX shows intermediate (1) coupling "with a functionalized isoquinoline in the presence of a palladium catalyst and a base in a solvent such as toluene. Intermediates like (3) can be converted to compounds of Formula I using the methods described herein.
Scheme XX
Figure imgf000048_0002
The construction of functionalized isoquinoline ring systems is also possible employing [4+2] cycloaddition reactions. For example (Scheme XXI) the use of vinyl isocyantes (1) in cycloaddition reactions with benzyne precusors (2) provides functionalized isoquinolones (3). Said isoquinolines can be incorporated into compounds of Formula I using the methods described herein.
Scheme XXI
Figure imgf000049_0001
Compounds of the invention can also be prepared by utilizing methods known to thise skilled in the art, such as, for example, the methods described in patent application WO 03/099274, published December 3, 2003. For example, WO 03/099274 provides extensive examples and teachings on the prepration of proline derivatives as mtermediates and these intermediates can be used in the preparation of compound of Formula 1.
The present invention also provides compositions comprising a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, e.g., excipient, or vehicle diluent.
The active ingredient, i.e., compound, in such compositions typically comprises from 0.1 weight percent to 99.9 percent by weight of the composition, and often comprises from about 5 to 95 weight percent. Thus, in one aspect of the invention, there is provided a composition comprising the compound of formula 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Preferably, the composition further comprises a compound having anti-HCV activity. As used herein, the term "anti-HCV activity" means the compound is effective to inhibit the function of a target selected from the group consisting of HCV metalloprotease, HCV serine protease, HCV polymerase, HCV helicase, HCV NS4B protein, HCV entry, HCV assembly, HCV egress, HCV NS5A protein, IMPDH and a nucleoside analog for the treatment of an HCV infection. Often, the other compound having anti-HCV activity is effective to inhibit the function of target in the HCV life cycle other than the HCV serine protease.
In one preferred aspect, the compound having anti-HCV activity is an interferon. Preferably, the interferon is selected from the group consisting of interferon alpha 2B, pegylated interferon alpha, consensus interferon, interferon alpha 2 A and lymphoblastiod interferon tau.
In another aspect of the invention, the compound having anti-HCV activity is selected from the group consisting of interleukin 2, interleukin 6, mterleukin 12, a compound that enhances the development of a type 1 helper T cell response, interfering RNA, anti-sense RNA, hniqimod, ribavirin, an inosine 5'- monophospate dehydrogenase inhibitor, amantadine, and rimantadine.
In one preferred aspect of the invention, the composition comprises a compound of the invention, an interferon and ribavirin.
In another preferred aspect of the invention, the compound having anti-HCV activity is a small molecule compound. As used herein, the term "small molecule compound" means a compound having a molecular weight of less than 1,500 daltons, preferably less than 1000 daltons. Preferably, the small molecule compound is effective to inhibit the function of a target selected from the group consisting of HCV metalloprotease, HCV serine protease, HCV polymerase, HCV helicase, HCV NS4B protein, HCV entry, HCV assembly, HCV egress, HCV NS5A protein, inosine monophophate dehydrogenase ("LMPDH") and a nucleoside analog for the treatment of an HCV infection.
Certain illustrative HCV inhibitor compounds which can be administered with the compounds of the present invention include those disclosed in the following publications: WO 02/04425 A2 published January 17, 2002, WO 03/007945 Al published January 30, 2003, WO 03/010141 A2 published February 6, 2003, WO 03/010142 A2 published February 6, 2003, WO 03/010143 Al published February 6, 2003, WO 03/000254 Al published January 3, 2003, WO 01/32153 A2 published May 10, 2001, WO 00/06529 published February 10, 2000, WO 00/18231 published April 6, 2O00, WO 00/10573 published March 2, 2000, WO 00/13708 published March 16, 2000, WO 01/85172 Al published November 15, 2001, WO 03/037893 Al published May 8, 2003, WO 03/037894 Al published May 8, 2003, WO 03/037895 Al published May 8, 2003, WO 02/100851 A2 published December 19, 2002, WO 02/100846 Al published December 19, 2002, EP 1256628 A2 published November 13, 2002, WO 99/01582 published January 14, 1999, WO 00/09543 published February 24, 2000.
Table 1 below lists some illustrative examples of compounds that can be administered with the compounds of this invention. The compounds of the invention can be administered with other anti-HCV activity compounds in combination therapy, either jointly or separately, or by combining the compounds into a composition.
TABLE 1
Figure imgf000051_0001
046712
49
Figure imgf000052_0001
Figure imgf000053_0001
The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be administered orally, parenterally or via an implanted reservoir. Oral administration or administration by injection are preferred. In some cases, the pH of the formulation may be adjusted with pharmaceutically acceptable acids, bases or buffers to enhance the stability of the formulated compound or its delivery form. The term parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intracutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intra- articular, intrasynovial, intrasternal, intrathecal, and intralesional injection or infusion techniques.
When orally administered, the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be administered in any orally acceptable dosage form including, but not limited to, capsules, tablets, and aqueous suspensions and solutions, h the case of tablets for oral use, carriers which are commonly used include lactose and corn starch.
Lubricating agents, such as magnesium stearate, are also typically added. For oral administration in a capsule form, useful diluents include lactose and dried corn starch. When aqueous suspensions are administered orally, the active ingredient is combined with emulsifying and suspending agents. If desired, certain sweetening and/or flavoring and/or coloring agents may be added. Other suitable carriers for the above noted compositions can be found in standard pharmaceutical texts, e.g. in "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences", 19th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Penn., 1995.
The pharmaceutical compositions can be prepared by known procedures using well-known and readily available ingredients. The compositions of this invention may be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures well known in the art. In making the compositions of the present invention, the active ingredient will usually be admixed with a carrier, or diluted by a carrier, or enclosed within a carrier which may be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container. When the carrier serves as a diluent, it may be a solid, semi-solid or liquid material which acts as a vehicle, excipient or medium for the active ingredient. Thus, the compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, beadlets, lozenges, sachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols, (as a solid or in a liquid medium), soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, sterile packaged powders and the like. Further details concerning the design and preparation of suitable delivery forms of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are known to those skilled in the art.
Dosage levels of between about 0.01 and about 1000 milligram per kilogram ("mg/kg") body weight per day, preferably between about 0.5 and about 250 mg/kg body weight per day of the compounds of the invention are typical in a monotherapy for the prevention and treatment of HCV mediated disease. Typically, the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention will be administered from about 1 to about 5 times per day or alternatively, as a continuous infusion. Such administration can be used as a chronic or acute therapy. The amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated and the particular mode of administration.
As the skilled artisan will appreciate, lower or higher doses than those recited above may be required. Specific dosage and treatment regimens for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors, including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health status, sex, diet, time of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination, the severity and course of the infection, the patient's disposition to the infection and the judgment of the treating physician. Generally, treatment is initiated with small dosages substantially less than the optimum dose of the peptide. Thereafter, the dosage is increased by small increments until the optimum effect under the circumstances is reached. In general, the compound is most desirably administered at a concentration level that will generally afford antivirally effective results without causing any harmful or deleterious side effects.
When the compositions of this invention comprise a combination of a compound of the invention and one or more additional therapeutic or prophylactic agent, both the compound and the additional agent are usually present at dosage levels of between about 10 to 100%), and more preferably between about 10 and 80% of the dosage normally administered in a monotherapy regimen. When these compounds or their pharmaceutically acceptable enantiomers, diastereomers, salts, solvates or prodrugs are formulated together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, the resulting composition may be administered in vivo to mammals, such as man, to inhibit HCV serine protease or to treat or prevent HCV virus infection.
Accordingly, another aspect of this invention provides methods of inhibiting HVC serine protease activity in patients by administering a compound of the present invention or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
In one aspect of the invention, there is provided a method of inhibiting the function of the HCV serine protease comprising contacting the HCV serine protease with a compound of the invention. In another aspect, there is provided a method of treating an HCV infection in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, prodrug or salt thereof.
Preferably, the method of administering the compound is effective to inhibit the function of the HCV serine protease. In a preferred aspect, the method further comprises administering another compound having anti-HCV activity (as described above) prior to, after or concurrently with a compound of the invention.
The compounds of the invention may also be used as laboratory reagents. Compounds may be instrumental in providing research tools for designing of viral replication assays, validation of animal assay systems and stmctural biology studies to further enhance knowledge of the HCV disease mechanisms. Further, the compounds of the present invention are useful in establishing or determining the binding site of other antiviral compounds, for example, by competitive inhibition.
The compounds of this invention may also be used to treat or prevent viral contamination of materials and therefore reduce the risk of viral infection of laboratory or medical personnel or patients who come in contact with such materials, e.g., blood, tissue, surgical instruments and garments, laboratory mstruments and garments, and blood collection or transfusion apparatuses and materials.
Further, the compounds and compositions of the invention can be used for the manufacture of a medicament for treating an HCV infection in a patient.
EXAMPLES
The specific examples that follow illustrate the syntheses of the compounds of the instant invention, and are not to be construed as limiting the invention in sphere or scope. The methods may be adapted to variations in order to produce compounds embraced by this invention but not specifically disclosed. Further, variations of the methods to produce the same compounds in somewhat different manner will also be evident to one skilled in the art.
Solution percentages express a weight to volume relationship, and solution ratios express a volume to volume relationship, unless stated otherwise. Nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectra were recorded either on a Bruker 300, 400 or 500 MHz spectrometer; the chemical shifts (6) are reported in parts per million. Flash chromatography was carried out on silica gel (SiO2) according to Still's flash chromatography technique (W.C. Still et al, J. Org. Chem., (1978), 43, 2923).
All Liquid Chromatography (LC) data were recorded on a Shimadzu LC-10AS liquid chromatograph using a SPD-10AV UV-Vis detector and Mass Spectrometry (MS) data were determined with a Micromass Platform for LC in electrospray mode (ES+).
Unless otherwise noted, in the following examples each compound was analyzed by LC/MS, using one of seven methodologies, having the following conditions.
Columns: (Method A) - YMC ODS S7 C18 3.0x50 mm (Method B) - YMC ODS-A S7 C18 3.0x50 mm (Method C) - YMC S7 C18 3.0x50 mm (Method D) - YMC Xterra ODS S7 3.0x50 mm (Method E) - YMC Xterra ODS S7 3.0x50 mm (Method F) - YMC ODS-A S7 C18 3.0x50 mm (Method G) - YMC C18 S5 4.6x50 mm] Gradient: 100% Solvent A/0% Solvent B to 0% Solvent A/100% Solvent B Gradient time: 2 min. (A, B, D, F, G); 8 min. (C, E) Hold time: 1 min. (A, B, D, F, G); 2 min. (C, E) Flow rate: 5 milliliters/min ("mL/min") Detector Wavelength: 220 nanometer ("nm") Solvent A: 10% MeOH / 90% H2O / 0.1% TFA Solvent B: 10% H20 / 90% MeOH / 0.1% TFA.
The abbreviations used in the present application, including particularly in the illustrative examples which follow, are well-known to those skilled in the art. Some of the abbreviations used are as follows:
rt room temperature
Boc tert-butyloxycarbonyl
DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
EtOAc ethyl acetate t-BuOK potassium t-butoxide
Et2O diethyl ether
TBME tert-butylmethyl ether
THF tetrahydrofuran
GDI carbonyldiimidazole
DBU l,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene
TFA trifluoroacetic acid
NMM N-methylmorpholine
HATU O-7-azabenzotriazol- 1 -yl
HBTU O- { lH-benzotriazol-1 -yl)-N,N,N',N'- tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate
HOBT N-hydroxybenzotriazole PyBrop bromo-bis-pyrrolidine-phosphonium hexafluorophosphate
DMF dimethylformamide
MeOH methanol
EDTA ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid
HRMS high resolution mass spectrometry
DMAP 4-dimethylaminopyridine
DIPEA diisopropylethylamine
DCM dichloromethane
DCE dichloroethane
Preparation of Intermediates:
Example 1 Pre ration of 4-(Isoquinolin-l-yloxy)-pyrrolidine-l,2-dicarboxylic acid 1-tert-butyl ester
Figure imgf000059_0001
A suspension of Boc-L-4-hydroxyproline (N-Boc (2S,4i?)-hydroxyproline) (3.85 g, 16.6 millimole ("mmol") (CHEM-IMPEX International) in DMSO (60 mL) was cooled in an ice bath for ~ 3 minutes, and then t-BuOK (4.66 g, 41.5 mmol) was added. Stirring and cooling in the ice bath was continued for a few minutes until a solid mass formed. At this time the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to rt over 1.5 h to give a clear colorless solution. 1-Chloroisoquinoline (3.0 g, 18.3 mmol) was added in two portions 1 min apart. The reaction was stirred for 24 h at.rt. The dark reaction mixture was partitioned between ether (200 mL) and water (600 mL). The aqueous phase was acidified to pH 4 using 4N HC1. The resulting milky yellow solution was extracted with ether (4 x 200 mL). The combined ether extracts were dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated hi vacuo to give a golden oil. Flash chromatography (2-4% eOH/CH2Cl2) gave 5.69 g (96%) of 4-(isoquinolin-l- yloxy)-pyrrolidine-l,2-dicarboxylic acid 1 -tert-butyl ester as an off-white solid: LC- MS (Method A, retention time: 3.06 min), MS m/z 359 (M++l).
Example 2 Preparation of 4-(6-Methoxy-isoquinoIin-l-yloxy)-pyrrolidine-l,2- dicarboxylic acid 1-tert-butyl ester
Figure imgf000060_0001
Step 1 of Example 2 Preparation of 6-Methoxy-2H-isoquinolin-l-one
Figure imgf000060_0002
6-Methoxy-2r7-isoquinolin-1-one To a solution of 3-methoxy cinnamic acid ( 11.04 g, 62 mmol), triethylamine (12.52 g, 124 mmol) in acetone (80 mL) was added ethyl chloroformate dropwise at 0°C. After stirring at this ternperature for 1 h, aqueous NaN3 (6.40 g, 100 mmol in 35 mL H2O) was added dropwise and the reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h at the ambient temperature. Water (100 mL) was added to the mixture and the volatile was removed in vacuo. The resulting slurry was extracted with toluene (3X50 mL) and the combined organic layers were dried over MgSO4. This dried solution was added dropwise to a heated solution of diphenylmethane (50 mL) and tributylamine (30 mL) at 190°C. The toluene was distilled off as added. After complete addition, the reaction temperature was raised to 210°C for 2 h. After cooling, the precipitated product was collected by filtration, washed with hexane (2X50 mL), dried to yield a white solid (5.53 g, 51%), MS m/z 176 (M++H).
Step 2 of Example 2 Preparation of 1 -chloro-6 methoxy isoquinoline
Figure imgf000061_0001
6-Methoxy-2H-isoquinolin-l-one in POCl3 was heated to gentle reflux for 3 h then evaporated in vacuo. The residue was poured into ice-water (20 mL) and neutralized to pΗ 10 with 10 M NaOΗ. Extracted with CΗC13. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, evaporated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (hexane-EtOAc) to afford a white solid.
1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 3.98 (s, 3H), 7.34-7.38 (m, 2 H), 7.69 (d, J*=5.5 Hz, IH), 8.10 (d, J=6.0 Hz, IH), 8.23 (d, J=9.5 Hz, IH), MS m/z 194 (M++H).
Step 3 of Example 2 Preparation of 4-(6-Methoxy-isoquinolin-l-yloxy)-pyrrolidine-l,2- dicarboxylic acid 1-tert-butyl ester
Figure imgf000062_0001
As described in Example 1 except that l-chloro-6-methoxy-isoquinoline was used in place of 1-chloro-isoquinoline. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) δ 1.41 (m, 9 H), 2.44 (m, 1 H), 2.75 (m, 1 H), 3.82-3.92 (m, 2 H), 3.96 (s, 3 H), 4.45 (m, 1 H), 5.50 (m, 1 H), 7.20 (m, 1 H), 7.27 (d, J=5.14 Hz, 1 H), 7.41 (d, J=2.45 Hz, 1 H), 7.48-7.59 (m, 3 H), 8.00-8.05 (m, 2 H), 8.08 (d, J=9.29 Hz, 1 H). LC-MS (retention time: 2.140 min.), MS m/z 465 (MH+).
Example 3 Preparation of PI elements for incorporation into compounds of Formula
I
I. Preparation of racemic (lR,25)/(lS,2R)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester hydrochloride (Method A and Method B)and chiral resolution of this racemate for the preparation of N- (LR, 2S)-l-amino-2- vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester hydrochloride (Method C)
Figure imgf000062_0002
The named compound was made racemic by each of the following methods A and B. This racemate could also be resolved to afford chiral Boc-(li?, 2S)-l-amino-2- vinylcyclopropyl carboxylic acid ester which was deprotected under acid conditions to afford (li?, 2S)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ester hydrochloride (Method C). Method A
A.1 Preparation of N-Benzyl Imine of Glycine Ethyl Ester
Figure imgf000063_0001
Glycine ethyl ester hydrochloride (303.8 g, 2.16 mole) was suspended in tert- butylmethyl ether (1.6 L). Benzaldehyde (231 g, 2.16 mole) and anhydrous sodium sulfate (154.6 g, 1.09 mole) were added and the mixture cooled to 0 °C using an ice- water bath. Triethylamine (455 mL, 3.26 mole) was added dropwise over 30 min and the mixture stirred for 48 h at rt. The reaction was then quenched by addition of ice- cold water (1 L) and the organic layer was separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with tert-butylmethyl ether (0.5 L) and the combined organic phases washed with a mixture of saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (I L) and brine (1 L). The solution was dried over MgSO4, concentrated in vacuo to afford 392.4 g of the N- benzyl imine product as a thick yellow oil that was used directly in the next step. !H NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz) 5 1.32 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 3H), 4.24 (q, J=7.1 Hz, 2H), 4.41 (d, J=l.l Hz, 2H), 7.39-7.47 (m, 3H), 7.78-7.81 (m, 2H), 8.31 (s, IH).
A.2 Preparation of racemic N-Boc-(lR,2S)/(iS,2R)-l-amino-2- vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000063_0002
toluene/RT
2) H30+
3) NaOH
4) (BOC)20
To a suspension of lithium tert-butoxide (84.06 g, 1.05 mol) in dry toluene (1.2 L), was added dropwise a mixture of the N-benzyl imine of glycine ethyl ester (100.4 g, 0.526 mol) and tr rø-l,4-dibromo-2-butene (107.0 g, 0.500 mol) in dry toluene (0.6 L) over 60 min. After completion of the addition, the deep red mixture was quenched by addition of water (1 L) and tβrt-butyhnethyl ether (TBME, 1 L). The aqueous phase was separated and extracted a second time with TBME (1 L). The organic phases were combined, 1 N HC1 (1 L) was added and the mixture stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The organic phase was separated and extracted with water (0.8 L). The aqueous phases were then combined, saturated with salt (700 g), TBME (1 L) was added and the mixture cooled to 0 °C. The stirred mixture was then basified to pH 14 by the dropwise addition of 10 N NaOH, the organic layer separated, and the aqueous phase extracted with TBME (2 x 500 mL). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgSO ) and concentrated to a volume of IL. To this solution of free amine, was added BOC2O or di-tert-butyldicarbonate (131.0 g, 0.6 mol) and the mixture stirred 4 days at rt. Additional di-tert-butyldicarbonate (50 g, 0.23 mol) was added to the reaction, the mixture refluxed for 3 h, and was then allowed cool to room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo to afford 80 g of crude material. This residue was purified by flash chromatography (2.5 Kg of SiO2, eluted with 1% to 2% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to afford 57 g (53%) of racemic N-Boc-(li?,2S)/(lS,2i?)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester as a yellow oil which solidified while sitting in the refrigerator: 1H ΝMR (CDC13, 300 MHz) δ 1.26 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 3H), 1.46 (s, 9H), 1.43-1.49 (m, IH), 1.76-1.82 (br m, IH), 2.14 (q, J*=8.6 Hz, IH), 4.18 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 5.12 (ddJ=10.3, 1.7 Hz, IH), 5.25 (br s, IH), 5.29 (dd, J=17.6, 1.7 Hz, IH), 5.77 (ddd, J*=17.6, 10.3, 8.9 Hz, IH); MS m/z 254.16 (M-l)
A.3 Preparation of Racemic (1R,2S)I(1S,2R) l-amino-2-vinyIcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester hydrochloride
Figure imgf000064_0001
N-Boc-(li2,2S)/(lS,2R)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester (9.39 g, 36.8 mmol) was dissolved in 4 Ν HCl/dioxane (90ml, 360 mmol) and was stirred for 2 h at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated to supply (li?,2S)/(lS,2i?)- l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester hydrochloride in quanitative yield (7 g, 100%). 1H NMR (methanol-d δ 1.32 (t, J=7.1, 3H), 1.72 (dd, J=10.2, 6.6 Hz, IH), 1.81 (dd, J=8.3, 6.6 Hz, IH), 2.38 (q, J=8.3 Hz, IH), 4.26-4.34 (m, 2H), 5.24 (dd, 10.3, 1.3 Hz, IH) 5.40 (d, J=17.2, IH), 5.69-5.81 (m, IH).
Method B
Preparation of Racemic (1R,2S)/(1S,2R) l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester hydrochloride
Figure imgf000065_0001
To a solution of potassium tert-butoxide (11.55 g, 102.9 mmol) in THF (450 mL) at - 78 °C was added the commercially available N,N-dibenzyl imine of glycine ethyl ester (25.0 g, 93.53 mmol) in THF (112 mL) . The reaction mixture was warmed to 0 °C, stirred for 40 min, and was then cooled back to -78 °C. To this solution was added trans- l,4-dibromo-2-butene (20.0 g, 93.50 mmol), the mixture stirred for 1 h at 0°C and was cooled back to -78°C. Potassium tert-butoxide (11.55 g, 102.9 mmol) was added, the mixture immediately warmed to 0°C, and was stirred one more hour before concentrating in vacuo. The crude product was taken up in Et2O (530 mL), IN aq. HC1 solution (106 mL, 106 mmol) added and the resulting biphasic mixture stirred for 3.5 h at rt. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was washed with Et2O (2x) and basified with a saturated aq. ΝaHCO3 solution. The desired amine was extracted with Et2O (3x) and the combined organic extract was washed with brine, dried (MgSO ), and concentrated in vacuo to obtain the free amine. This material was treated with a 4N HC1 solution in dioxane (100 mL, 400 mmol) and concentrated to afford (li?,2S)/(lS,2i?)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester hydrochloride as a brown semisolid (5.3 g, 34% yield) identical to the material obtained from procedure A, except for the presence of a small unidentified aromatic impurity (8%).
Method C
Resolution of N-Boc-(lR,2S)/(lS,2R)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000066_0001
Resolution A
To an aqueous solution of sodium phosphate buffer (0.1 M, 4.25 liter ("L"), pH 8) housed in a 12 Liter jacked reactor, maintained at 39°C, and stirred at 300 rpm was added 511 grams of Acalase 2.4L (about 425 mL) (Novozymes North America Inc.). When the temperature of the mixture reached 39°C, the pH was adjusted to 8.0 by the addition of a 50% NaOH in water. A solution of the racemic N-Boc- (li?,2S)/(lS,2i?)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester (85g) in 850 mL of DMSO was then added over a period of 40 min. The reaction temperature was then maintained at 40°C for 24.5h during which time the pH of the mixture was adjusted to 8.0 at the 1.5h and 19.5h time points using 50% ΝaOH in water. After 24.5h, the enantio-excess of the ester was determined to be 97.2%, and the reaction was cooled to room temperature (26°C) and stirred overnight (16h) after which the enantio-excess of the ester was determined to be 100%. The pH of the reaction mixture was then adjusted to 8.5 with 50% ΝaOH and the resulting mixture was extracted with MTBE (2 x 2 L). The combined MTBE extract was then washed with 5% ΝaHCO3 (3 x 100 mL), water (3 x 1O0 mL), and evaporated in vacuo to give the enantiomerically pure N-Boc-(\R,2S)l- 1 -amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester as light yellow solid (42.55 g; purity: 97% @ 210 nm, containing no acid; 100% enantiomeric excess ("ee").
The aqueous layer from the extraction process was then acidified to pH 2 with 50% H2SO and extracted with MTBE (2 x 2 L). The MTBE extract was washed with water (3 x 100 mL) and evaporated to give the acid as light yellow solid (42.74 g; purity: 99% @ 210 nm, containing no ester).
Figure imgf000067_0001
1R, 2S-ester 1S,2R-acid
Figure imgf000067_0002
Figure imgf000068_0001
Resolution B
To 0.5 mL 100 mM Heps»Na buffer (pH 8.5) in a well of a 24 well plate (capacity: 10 mL/well), 0.1 mL of Savinase 16.0L (protease from Bacillus clausii) (Novozymes North America Inc.) and a solution of the racemic N-Boc- (li?,2S)/(lS,2i?)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester (10 mg) in 0.1 mL of DMSO were added. The plate was sealed and incubated at 250 rpm at 40°C. After 18h, enantio-excess of the ester was determined to be 44.3% as following: 0.1 mL of the reaction mixture was removed and mixed well with 1 mL ethanol; after centrifugation, 10 microliter ("μl") of the supernatant was analyzed with the chiral HPLC. To the remaining reaction mixture, 0.1 mL of DMSO was added, and the plate was incubated for additional 3 days at 250 rpm at 40°C, after which four mL of ethanol was added to the well. After centrifugation, 10 μl of the supernatant was analyzed with the chiral HPLC and enantio-excess of the ester was determined to be 100%.
Resolution C
To 0.5 ml 100 mM Heρs»Νa buffer (pH 8.5) in a well of a 24 well plate
(capacity: 10 mL/well), 0.1 ml of Esperase 8.0L, (protease from Bacillus halodurans) (Novozymes North America h e.) and a solution of the racemic N-Boc- (li?,2S)/(lS,2i?)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester (10 mg) in 0.1 mL of DMSO were added. The plate was sealed and incubated at 250 rpm at 40°C. After 18 hour, enantio-excess of the ester was determined to be 39.6% as following: 0.1 mL of the reaction mixture was removed and mixed well with 1 mL ethanol; after cenrifugation, 10 μl of the supernatant was analyzed with the chiral HPLC. To the remaining reaction mixture, 0.1 mL of DMSO was added, and the plate was incubated for additional 3 days at 250 rpm at 40°C, after which four mL of ethanol was added to the well. After centrifugation, 10 μl of the supernatant was analyzed with the chiral HPLC and enantio-excess of the ester was determined to be 100%.
Samples analysis was carried out in the following manner:
1) Sample preparation: About 0.5 ml of the reaction mixture was mixed well with 10 volume of EtOH. After centrifugation, 10 μl of the supernatant was injected onto HPLC column.
2) Conversion determination:
Column: YMC ODS A, 4.6 x 50 mm, S-5 μ
Solvent: A, 1 millimolar ("mM") HC1 in water; B, MeCN Gradient: 30% B for 1 min; 30% to 45% B over 0.5 min; 45% B for 1.5 min; 45% to
30% B over 0.5 min.
Flow rate: 2 mL/min
UV Detection: 210 nm
Retention time: acid, 1.2 min; ester, 2.8 min.
3) Enantio-excess determination for the ester: Column: CHIRACEL OD-RH, 4.6 x 150 mm, S-5 μm Mobile phase: MeCN/50 mM HClO4 in water (67/33) Flow rate: 0.75 mL/min. UV Detection: 210 nm. Retention time: (IS, 2R) isomer as acid: 5.2 min; Rcaemate: 18.5 min and 20.0 min;
(1R, 2S) isomer as ester: 18.5 min.
II. Preparation of N-Boc-(lR,2S)-l-amino-2-cycIopropylcycϊopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000070_0001
A solution of N-Boc-(li?,2S)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid (255 mg, 1.0 mmol) in ether (10 mL) was treated with palladium acetate (5 mg, 0.022 mmol). The orange/red solution was placed under an atmosphere of Ν2. An excess of diazomethane in ether was added dropwise over the course of 1 h. The resulting solution was stirred at rt for 18 h. The excess diazomethane was removed using a stream of nitrogen. The resulting solution was concentrated by rotary evaporation to give the crude product. Flash chromatography (10% EtOAc/hexane) provided 210 mg (78%) of N-Boc-(li?,2S)-l-amino-2-cyclopropylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester as a colorless oil. LC-MS (retention time: 2.13, similar to method A except: gradient time 3 min, Xterra MS C18 S7 3.0 x 50mm column), MS m/e 270 (M++l).
III. 1-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-cyclopropane-carboxylic acid is commercially available
Figure imgf000070_0002
IV. Preparation of 1-aminocyc obutanecarboxylic acid methyl ester-hydrochloride
Figure imgf000070_0003
1-aminocyclobutanecarboxylic acid (100 mg, 0.869 mrnol)(Tocris) was dissolved in 10 mL of MeOH, HC1 gas was bubbled in for 2h. The reaction mixture was stirred for 18 h, and then concentrated in vacuo to give 144 mg of a yellow oil. Trituration with 10 mL of ether provided 100 mg of the titled product as a white solid. 1H NMR (CDC13) δ 2.10-2.25 (m, IH), 2.28-2.42 (m, IH), 2.64-2.82 (m, 4H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 9.21 (br s, 3H).
V. Preparation of racemic (1R,2R)1(1S,2S) l-Amino-2- ethylcyclopropanecarboxylic acid tert-butyl ester, shown below.
Figure imgf000071_0001
I Q ethyl syn to carboxy
Step 1: Preparation of 2-Ethylcyclopropane-l,l-dicarboxylic acid di-tert-butyl ester, shown below.
Figure imgf000071_0002
To a suspension of benzyltriethylammonium chloride (21.0 g, 92.2 mmol) in a 50%> aqueous NaOH solution (92.4 g in 185 mL H2O) was added 1,2-dibromobutane (30.0 g, 138.9 mmol) and di-tert-butylmalonate (20.0 g, 92.5 mmol). The reaction mixture was vigorously stirred 18 h at rt, a mixture of ice and water was then added. The 0 crude product was extracted with CH2C12 (3x) and sequentially washed with water (3x), brine and the organic extracts combined. The organic layer was dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was flash chromatographed (100 g SiO2, 3% Et2O in hexane) to afford the titled product (18.3 g, 67.8 mmol, 73% yield) which was used directly in the next reaction. 5
Step 2: Preparation of racemic 2-Ethylcyclopropane-l,l-dicarboxylic acid tert-butyl ester, shown below.
Figure imgf000072_0001
The product of Step 1 (18.3 g, 67.8 mmol) was added to a suspension of potassium tert-butoxide (33.55 g, 299.0 mmol) in dry ether (500 mL) at 0 °C, followed by H20 (1.35 mL, 75.0 mmol) and was vigorously stirred overnight at rt. The reaction mixture was poured in a mixture of ice and water and washed with ether (3 ). The aqueous layer was acidified with a 10% aq. citric acid solution at 0°C and extracted with EtOAc (3x). The combined organic layers were washed with water (2x), brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated in vacuo to afford the titled product as a pale yellow oil (10 g, 46.8 mmol, 69% yield).
Step 3: Preparation of (1R,2R)/(IS,2S) 2-Ethyl-l-(2- trimethylsilanylethoxycarbonylamino)cyclopropane-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester, shown below.
Figure imgf000072_0002
To a suspension, of the product of Step 2 (10 g, 46.8 mmol) and 3 g of freshly activated 4A molecular sieves in dry benzene (160 mL), was added Et3N (7.50 mL, 53.8 mmol) and DPPA (11 mL, 10.21 mmol). The reaction mixture was refluxed for 3.5 h, 2-trimethylsilyl-ethanol (13.5 mL, 94.2 mmol) was then added, and the reaction mixture was refluxed overnite. The reaction mixture was filtered, diluted with Et2O, washed with a 10% aqueous citric acid solution, water, saturated aqueous NaHCO3, water (2x), brine (2X), dried (MgSO4) and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was suspended with lOg of Aldrich polyisocyanate scavenger resin in 120 mL of CH2C1 , stirred at rt overnite and filtered to afford the titled product (8 g, 24.3 mmol; 52%) as a pale yellow oil: 1H NMR (CDC13) δ 0.03 (s, 9H), 0.97 (m, 5H), 1.20 (bm, IH), 1.45 (s, 9H), 1.40-1.70 (m, 4H), 4.16 (m, 2H), 5.30 (bs, IH). Step 4: Preparation of racemic (IR,2R)/(IS,2S) l-Amino-2- ethylcyclopropanecarboxylic acid tert-butyl ester, shown below.
Figure imgf000073_0001
ethyl syn to carboxy To the product of Step 3 (3 g, 9 mmol) was added a 1.0 M TBAF solution in THF (9.3 mL, 9.3 mmol) and the mixture heated to reflux for 1.5 h, cooled to rt and then diluted with 500 mL of EtOAc. The solution was successively washed with water (2x100 mL), brine (2x100 mL), dried (MgSO4), concentrated in vacuo to provide the title intermediate
VI. Preparation of chiral (7R,2S)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester hydrochloride
Figure imgf000073_0002
N-BOC (H?,2S)-l-amino-2-vinylcyclopropanecarbox-ylic acid ethyl ester (8.5 g, 33.3 mmol) was stirred under an Ν2 atmosphere with 200 mL of 4N HCl/dioxane (Aldrich) at rt for 3 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure keeping the temperature below 40 C. This gave 6.57 g (-100%) of (ii?,2S)-l-amino-2- vinylcyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester hydrochloride as a light tan solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD) δ 1.31 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 3 H), 1.69-1.82 (m, 2 H), 2.38 (q,
J=8.8 Hz, 1 H), 4.29 (q, J=7.0 Hz, 2 H), 5.22 (d, J=10.3 Hz, 1 H), 5.40 (d, .7=17.2 Hz, 1 H), 5.69-5.81 (m, 1 H). LC-MS (Method J, retention time: 0.58 min), MS m/z 156 (M++l). Example 4 General procedure for the preparation of sulfamides
H20 o ,o base cX ^NCO Cl NH2 R-N-S-NH2 R2
HN— R2
The intermediate sulfamoyl chloride was prepared by addition of water (1 equiv) in THF to a cold (-20 °C) stirred solution of chlorosulfonyl isocyanate (1 equiv) in THF and the resulting solution allowed to warm to 0 °C. To this solution was added anhydrous Et3N (1 equiv) followed by requisite secondary amine (1 equiv). The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature, then filtered and the filtrate was rotary evaporated to afford the desired sulfamides.
Examples 5-18 Preparation of Compounds 1-13.
The key step in the preparation of Compounds 1-13 is the coupling of a tripeptide carboxylic acid and a sulfamide to provide the desired tripeptide sulfamide: The general reaction scheme of this key step is shown below:
Figure imgf000074_0001
Compounds 1-13
Example 5
Preparation of l-{[l-(2-Methoxycarbonylamino-3,3-dimethyl-butyryl)-4-(7- methoxy-2-phenyl-quinolin-4-yloxy)-pyrrolid ine-2-carbonyl] -amino } -2-vinyl-cyclopropanecarboxylic acid
Figure imgf000075_0001
Step 1 of Example 5 Preparation of 1 - { [4-(7-Methoxy-2-phenyl-quinolin-4-yloxy)-p yrrolidine-2- carbonyl]-amino}-2-vinyl-cyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000075_0002
To a solution of (2S, 4R) 4-(7-methoxy-2-phenyl-quinolin-4-yloxy)-pyrrolidine- 1 ,2- dicarboxylic acid 1 -tert-butyl ester (4.4 g, 9.5 mmol) in CH3CN (100 mL) was added (1R, 2S) l-amino-2-vinyl-cyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester hydrochloride (2.37 g, 12.35 mmol), DIEA (8.27 mL, 47.5 mmol) and the coupling reagent HOBt (2.18 g, 14.25 mmol) and HBTU (5.4 g, 14.25 mmol). The solution was stirred at rt. overnight. The solution was then concentrated, washed with water and extracted with ethyl acetate twice. The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give yellowish oil. It was purified by flash column chromatography (silica gel, 1 : 1 EtOAc:Hexanes ) to give yellowish foam as coupling product. Then it was dissolved in 4N HC1 in dioxane (20 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt. for 4 hr. Then it was concentrated and the crude product was further purified by Prep. HPLC to give yellowish solid as TFA salt. (4.5 g, 77% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) δl.23 (t, J=7.09 Hz, 3 H), 1.46 (dd, J -9. 6, 5.50 Hz, 1 H), 1.78 (dd, J*=8.07, 5.38 Hz, 1 H), 2.23 (m, 1 H), 2.59 (m, 1 H), 2.95 (m, 1 H) , 3.90- 3.99 (m, 2 H) , 4.05 (s, 3 H), 4.14 (q, J=7.09 Hz, 2 H) , 4.68 (dd, J=10.27, 7.58 Hz, 1 H) , 4.86(m, IH), 5.12 (dd, J=10.27, 1.47 Hz, 1 H), 5.30 (dd, J=17.00, 1.34 Hz, 1 H), 5.76 (m, 1 H), 5.96 (s, 1 H), 7.45 (dd, J=9.29, 2.45 Hz, 1 H), 7.54 (d, J=2.20 Hz, 1 H), 7.62 (s, 1 H), 7.68-7.77 (m, 3 H), 8.05 (m, 2 H), 8.38 (d, J*=9.29 Hz, 1 FT). LC- MS (retention time: 1.243 min.), MS m/z 502 (MH+).
Step 2 of Example 5
Preparation of 1 - { [ 1 -(2-Methoxycarbonylamino-3 ,3-dimethyl-butyryl)-4-(7- methoxy-2-phenyl-quinolin-4-yloxy)-pyrrolidine-2-carbonyl]-amino}-2 -vinyl- cyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000076_0001
To a solution of l-{[4-(7-methoxy-2-phenyl-quinolin-4-yloxy)-pyrrolidine-2- carbonyl] -amino }-2-vinyl-cyclopropanecarboxy lie acid ethyl ester (600 mg, 1.115 mmol) in CH3CN (20 mL) was 2-methoxycarbonylamino-3,3-dimethyl-butyric acid (317mg, 1.673 mmol), DIEA (0.97 mL, 5.575 mmol) and the coupling reagent HOBt (256 mg, 1.673 mmol) and HBTU (634 g, 1.673 mmol). The solution was stirred at rt. overnight. Then it was concentrated, washed with water and extracted with ethyl acetate twice. The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give yellowish oil. It was then purified by Prep. HPLC column to give a yellowish oil as product. (410 mg, 47 % yield).^ NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) δl.03 (s, 9 H), 1.22 (t, J=7.09 Hz, 3 H), 1.41 (dd, J=9.41, 5.26 Hz, 1 H), 1.71 (dd, J=8.19, 5.26 Hz, 1 H), 2.17 (m, 1 H), 2.50 (m, 1 H), 2.77 (m, 1 H), 3.33 (s, 3 H), 4.03 (s, 3 H), 4.04-4.14 (m, 3 H), 4.18 (s, 1 H), 4.61-4.69 (m, 2 H), 4.86 (m,lH), 5.08 (dd, J=10.27, 1.71 Hz, 1 H), 5.25 (d, J=17.11 Hz, 1 H), 5.72-5.82 ( , 2 H), 7.39 (dd, J=9.29, 2.20 Hz, 1 H), 7.51 (m, 1 H), 7.63 (m, 1 H), 7.69-7.77 (m, 3 H), 8.06 (m, 2 H), 8.35 (d, J=9.29 Hz, 1 H), 8.75 (s, 1 H). LC-MS (retention time: 2.857 min.), MS m/z 673 (MH+).
Step 3 of Example 5 Preparation of l-{[l-(2-Methoxycarbonylamino-3,3-dimethyl-butyryl)-4-(7- methoxy-2-phenyl-qumolm-4-yloxy)-pyrrolidine-2-carbonyl]-amino}-2-vinyl- cyclopropanecarboxylic acid
Figure imgf000077_0001
To a solution of l-{[l-(2-methoxycarbonylamino-3,3-dimethyl-butyryl)-4-(7- memoxy-2-phenyl-quinolin-4-yloxy)-pyrrolidine-2-carbonyl]-amino}-2-vinyl- cyclopropane-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (410 mg, 0. 52 mmol) in THF (20 mL), methanol (11.5 mL) and water (3.8 mL) mixture, lithium hydroxide monohydrate (328 mg, 7.82 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for overnight. Then it was acidified with IN HC1 solution and concentrated. The residue was extracted with EtOAc twice and the organic layers were combined. Then it was dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to give an off-white solid. (230 mg, 69% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) δ 1.02 (s, 9 H), 1.43 (dd, J=9.54, 5.14 Hz, 1 H), 1.68 (dd, J=8.07, 5.14 Hz, 1 H), 2.17 (m, 1 H), 2.57 (m, 1 H), 2.75 (m, 1 H), 3.34 (s, 3 H), 4.03 (s, 3 H),4.06(m, IH), 4.18 (s, 1 H), 4.60-4.70 (m, 2 H), 4.88 (m, IH), 5.08 (dd, J*=T0.39, 1.59 Hz, 1 H), 5.25 (dd, J=17.36, 1.71 Hz, 1 H), 5.77-5.87 (m, 2 H) 7.38 (dd, J=9.29, 2.20 Hz, 1 H), 7.50 (m, 1 H), 7.62 (m, 1 H), 7.69-7.78 (m, 3 H), 8.03- 8.07 (m, 2 H), 8.36 (d, J=9.20 Hz, 1 H). LC-MS (retention time: 2.177 min.), MS m/z 645 (MH+).
Example 6 Preparation of Compound 1 :
Figure imgf000078_0001
Compound 1
To a solution of l-{[l-(2-methoxycarbonylamino-3,3-dimethyl-butyryl)-4-(7- methoxy-2-phenyl-quinolin-4-yloxy)-pynolidine-2-carbonyl]-amino}-2-vinyl- cyclopropane-carboxylic acid (40 mg, 0.0527 mmol) in THF (5 mL), GDI (12.8 mg, 0.0791 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was heated under reflux for 45 min. In another round-bottomed flask, LiHMDS (1.0 M solution in hexanes, 0.21 mL, 0.21 mmol) was added to a solution of N-ethylmethylsulfamide (29 mg, 0.21 mmol) in THF (5 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at rt for lh. Two reaction mixtures were added together and stirred at rt for 2h. Water was added to quench the reaction and the reaction solution was extracted with EtOAc. The oraganic layer was separated and dried over MgSO4. Evaporation of solvent gave crude product which was purified by Prep. HPLC to afford desired N-acylsulfamide. (18.4 mg, 40% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) δl.03 (s, 9 H), 1.14(t, J=7.21 Hz, 3 H), 1.37 (dd, J=9.29, 5.38 Hz, 1 H), 1.84 (dd, J=8.07, 5.62 Hz, 1 H), 2.17 (dd, J=17.36, 8.80 Hz, 1 H), 2.40 (m, 1 H), 2.72 (m, 1 H), 2.87 (s, 3 H),3.20-3.30(m, 2H), 3.36 (s, 3 H), 4.04 (s, 3 H), 4.11 (dd, J=12.35, 2.81 Hz, 1 H), 4.21 (s, 1 H), 4.53-4.65 (m, 2 H), 4.82 (m, 1 H), 5.11 (dd, J=10.15, 1.59 Hz, 1 H), 5.26 (d, J=16.87 Hz, 1 H), 5.70 (m, 1 H), 5.84 (s, br, 1 H), 7.41 (dd, J=9.29, 2.20 Hz, 1 H), 7.52 (d, J=2.20 Hz, 1 H), 7.64 (s, 1 H) 7.68-7.80 (m, 3 H), 8.03-8.10 (m, 2 H), 8.34 (d, J=9.29 Hz, 1 H), 9.16 (s, 1 H). LC-MS (retention time: 2.333 min.), MS m/z 765 (MH+).
Example 7
Preparation of Compound 2
Figure imgf000079_0001
Compound 2
Compound 2 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 2 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using methoxymethylamine in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.070 min.), MS m/z 767 (MH*).
Example 8
Preparation of Compound 3:
Figure imgf000080_0001
Compound 3 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 3 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using dimethylamine in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.243 min.), MS m/z 751 (MH+).
Example 9
Preparation of Compound 4:
Figure imgf000080_0002
Compound 4 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 4 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using azetidine in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.223 min.), MS m/z 763 (Mϊ ). Example 10
Preparation of Compound 5:
Figure imgf000081_0001
Compound 5 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 5 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using N-methylaniline in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.503 min.), MS m/z 813 (MH+).
Example 11 Preparation of Compound 6:
Figure imgf000081_0002
Compound 6 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 6 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using pyrrolidine place of methylethylamine 1H NMR(400 MHz, CD3OD) δ 1.02(s, 9 H), 1.37 (dd, J=9.3 Hz, 5.1 Hz, 1 H), 1.82-1.90 (m, 5 H), 2.19 (m, 1 H), 2.40 (m, 1 H), 2.74 (m, 1 H), 3.31- 3.49 (m, 7 H), 4.04 (s, 3 H), 4.11 (m, 1 H), 4.21 (s, 1 H), 4.54-4.64 (m, 2 H), 4.85 (m, 1 H), 5.1 l(d, J=10.3 Hz, 1 H), 5.28 (d, J=17.1 Hz, 1 H), 5.69 (m, 1 H), 5.84 (s, br, 1 H), 7.41 (dd, J=9.3 Hz, 1.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.52 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.63 (s, 1 H), 7.68-7.77 (m, 3 H), 8.06 (m, 2 H), 8.34 (d, J=9.3 Hz, 1 H). LC-MS (retention time: 2.340 min.), MS m/z 777 (MH+).
Example 12 Preparation of Compound 7
Figure imgf000082_0001
Compound 7 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 7 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using isopropylmethylamie in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.420 min.), MS m/z 779 (MH*).
Example 13 Preparation of Compound 8
Figure imgf000083_0001
Compound 2 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 8 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using pynolidine in place of methylethylamineand a racemic PI element. MS m/z 777 (M f).
Example 14
Preparation of Compound 9 ι
Figure imgf000083_0002
Compound 2 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 9 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using methylbenzylamine in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.430 min.), MS m/z 827 (MH+). Example 15 Preparation of Compound 10
Figure imgf000084_0001
Compound 10 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 10 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using piperidine in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.453 min.), MS m/z 791 (MH+).
Example 16 Preparation of Compound 11
Figure imgf000084_0002
Compound 11 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. h the case of Compound 11 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using tetrahydro-2H-l,2-oxazine in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.317 min.), MS m/z 793 (MH*).
Example 17
Preparation of Compound 12
Compound 12 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. In the case of Compound 12 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using morpholine in place of methylethylamine. 1H MR(400 MHz ,CD3OD) δ 1.02(s, 9 H), 1.38 (dd, J=9.1 Hz, 5.6 Hz, 1 H), 1.88 (dd, J=8.1 Hz, 5.6 Hz, 1 H), 2.21 (m, 1 H), 2.40 (m, 1 H), 2.75 (m,
1 H), 3.36 (s, 3 H), 3.66 (m, 4 H), 4.04 (s, 3 H), 4.10 (dd, J=12.5 Hz, 2.9 Hz, 1 H), 4.21 (s, 1 H), 4.55-4.65 (m, 2 H), 4.85 (m, 5 H), 5.15(dd, J=10.3 Hz, 1.5 Hz, 1 H), 5.29 (dd, J=17.1 Hz, 1.5 Hz, 1 H), 5.70 (m, 1 H), 5.83 (s, br, 1 H), 7.41 (dd, J=9.3 Hz, 2.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.52 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.63 (s, 1 H), 7.69-7.79 (m, 3 H), 8.07 (m,
2 H), 8.34 (d, J=9.3 Hz, 1 H). LC-MS (retention time: 2.210 min.), MS m/z 793 (MH+).
Example 18 Preparation of Compound 13
Figure imgf000086_0001
Compound 13 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 1 of Example 5 and as described for Compound 1 of Example 6. hi the case of Compound 13 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using N-methylpiperizine in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 1.923 min.), MS m/z 806 (MH ).
Examples 19-27 Preparation of Compounds 14-22.
Example 19 General scheme for the preparation of Compounds 14-22
Scheme 2
Figure imgf000086_0002
Figure imgf000087_0001
Compound 14
Step 1 of Example 19
Figure imgf000087_0002
To a solution of (1R, 2S) l-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-2-vinyl- cyclopropanecarboxylic acid (217 mg, 1.194 mmol) in THF (5 L), GDI (290 mg, 1.791 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was heated under reflux for 45 min. In another round-bottomed flask, LiHMDS (1.0 M solution in hexanes, 2.4 mL, 2.4 mmol) was added to a solution of N-ethylmethylsulfamide (330 mg, 2.388 mmol) in THF (5 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at rt for lh. Two reaction mixtures were added together and stirred at rt for 2h. Water was added to quench the reaction and the reaction solution was extracted with EtOAc. The oraganic layer was separated and dried over MgSO4. Evaporation of solvent gave crude product which was purified by Prep. HPLC to afford desired N-acylsulfamide. N-acylsulfamide was then dissolved in 4N HCl solution in dioxane (2mL) and stirred at rt for 4h.
Evaporation of solution give brownish oil as HCl salt. (112mg, 33% yield). 1H NMR (400Mz, CD3OD) δ 1.16 (t, J=7.21 Hz, 3 H), 1.68 (dd, J=10.03, 7.83 Hz, 1 H), 2.15 (m, 1 H), 2.37 (m, 1 H), 2.89 (s, 3 H), 3.30 (m, 2 H), 5.31 (d, J=10.27 Hz, 1 H), 5.42 (d, J=17.12 Hz, 3 H), 5.68 (m, 1 H). LC-MS (retention time: 0.883 min.), MS m/z 270 (M+Na+). Step 2 of Example 19
Figure imgf000088_0001
To a solution of (2S, 4R)4-(7-methoxy-2-phenyl-quinolin-4-yloxy)-pyrrolidine-l,2- dicarboxylic acid 1-tert-butyl ester (62.5 mg, 0.135 mmol) in CH3CN (10 mL) was added the acylsulfamide-Pl -amino acid (42 mg, 0.148 mmol), DIEA (0.12 mL, 0.675 mmol) and the coupling reagent HOBt (31 mg, 0.203 mmol) and HBTU (77 mg, 0.203 mmol). The solution was stirred at rt for overnight. Then it was concentrated, washed with water and extracted with ethyl acetate twice. The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give yellow oil. It was purified by Prep. HPLC column to give a colorless thick oil which was then dissolved in 4N HCl in dioxane (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt. for overnight. Evaporation of solvent gave the desired product as a hydrochloride salt (62 mg, yellowish oil, 68% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) δ 1.14 (t, J=7.21 Hz, 3 H), 1.32 (dd, J=9.78, 5.62 Hz, 1 H), 1.90 (dd, J=7.58, 5.62 Hz, 1 H), 2.31 (m, 1 H), 2.51 (m, 1 H), 2.86 (s, 3 H), 3.06 (m, 1 H), 3.20-3.30(m, 2 H), 3.56 (m, 1 H), 3.72 (m, 2 H), 3.96 (m, 1 H), 4.06 (s, 3 H), 4.80(m, IH), 5.13 (d, J=10.52 Hz, 1 H), 5.29 (d, J=16.87 Hz, 1 H), 5.60 (m, 1 H), 5.97 (s, 1 H), 7.49 (dd, J=9.29, 1.96 Hz, 1 H), 7.57 (d, J=1.96 Hz, 1 H), 7.63 (s, 1 H), 7.68-7.79 (m, 3 H), 8.08 (m, 2 H), 8.50 (d, J=9.29 Hz, 1 H). LC-MS (retention time: 1.810 min.), MS m/z 594 (MH+).
Step 3 of Example 19
Figure imgf000089_0001
Compound 14
To a solution of dipeptide sulfamide (product of step 2 of Example 19, 14 mg, 0.021 mmol) in CH3CN (5 mL) was added N-boc-L-t-leucine (7.3 mg, 0.0315 mmol), DIEA (0.022 mL, 0.126 mmol) and the coupling reagent HOBt (4.8 mg, 0.0315 mmol) and HBTU (12 mg, 0.0315 mmol). The solution was stirred at rt for overnight. Then it was concentrated, washed with water and extracted with ethyl acetate twice. The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give yellow oil. It was purified by Prep. HPLC column to give a white solid as final product. (9.0 mg, 53% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz,
CD3OD) δ 1.02 (s, 9 H), 1.13 (t, J=7.09 Hz, 3 H), 1.25 (s, 9 H), 1.37 (m, 1 H), 1.82 (m, 1 H), 2.15 (m, 1 H), 2.30 (m, 1 H), 2.64 (m, 1 H), 2.87 (s, 3 H), 3.20-3.30(m, 2 H), 3.94(s, 3H), 4.07 (m, 1 H), 4.25 (m, 1 H), 4.47-4.63 (m, 3 H), 5.09 (d, J=10.51 Hz, 1 H), 5.25 (d, J=17.37 Hz, 1 H), 5.56 (s, br, 1 H), 5.71 (m, 1 H), 6.66 (d, J=9.05 Hz, 1 H), 7.07 (m, 1 H), 7.24 (s, 1 H), 7.38 (d, J=1.96 Hz, 1 H), 7.46-7.56 (m, 3 H), 8.01-8.09 (m, 3 H). LC-MS (retention time: 2.563 min.), MS m/z 807 (MH+).
Example 20 Preparation of Compound 15
Figure imgf000090_0001
Compound 15 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. In the case of Compound 15 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using dimethylamine in place of methylethylamine.. LC-MS (retention time: 2.463 min.), MS m/z 793 (MH ).
Example 21 Preparation of Compound 16
Figure imgf000090_0002
Compound 16 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. In the case of Compound 16 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using N-methylaniline in place of methylethylamine. LC-MS (retention time: 2.723 min.), MS m/z 856 ( H1).
Example 22 Preparation of Compound 17
Figure imgf000091_0001
Compound 17 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. In the case of Compound 17 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using dimethylamine in place of methylethylamine, and 6-methoxy-l-chloroisoquinoline was used in place of 2- phenyl-4-chloro-7-methoxyquinoline. LC-MS (retention time: 2.807 min.), MS m/z 717 (MH+).
Example 23 Preparation of Compound 18
Figure imgf000092_0001
Compound 18 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. In the case of Compound 18 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using pyrrolidine in place of methylethylamine, and 6-methoxy-l-chloroisoquinoline was used in place of 2- phenyl-4-chloro-7-methoxyquinoline. LC-MS (retention time: 2.927 min.), MS m/z 743 (MH+).
Example 24 Preparation of Compound 19
Figure imgf000092_0002
Compound 19 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. In the case of Compound 19 however, 6-methoxy-l-chloroisoquinoline was used in place of 2-phenyl-4-chloro-7- methoxyquinoline. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) δ 1.02 (s, 9 H), 1.14 (t, J=7.21 Hz, 3 H), 1.25 (s, 9 H), 1.37 (m, 1 H), 1.81 (m, 1 H), 2.13-2.30(m, 2 H), 2.57 (m, 1 H), 2.87 (s, 3 H), 3.20-3.30(m, 2 H), 3.90 (s, 3 H), 4.04(m, 1 H), 4.23 (m, 1 H), 4.42 (d, J=12.22 Hz, 1 H), 4.46-4.60(m, 2H), 5.11 (d, J=10.27 Hz, 1 H), 5.29 (d, J=16.87 Hz, 1 H), 5.70 (m, 1 H), 5.81 (s, br,l H), 6.60 (d, J=8.56 Hz, 1 H), 7.08 (d, J=8.07 Hz, 1 H), 7.16 (d, J=2.45 Hz, 1 H), 7.23 (d, J=5.87 Hz, 1 H), 7.87 (d, J=5.87 Hz, 1 H), 8.06 (d, J=9.05 Hz, 1 H). LC-MS (retention time: 2.910 min.), MS m/z 731 (MH+).
Example 25
Preparation of Compound 20
Figure imgf000093_0001
Compound 20 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. In the case of Compound 20 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using N-methylaniline in place of methylethylamine, and 6-methoxy-l-chloroisoquinoline was used in place of 2- phenyl-4-chloro-7-methoxyquinoline. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) δ 0.95 (s, 9 H), 1.26 (s, 9 H), 1.41 (m, 1 H), 1.87 (m, 1 H), 2.12-2.25 (m, 2 H), 2.50 (dd, J=13.94, 7.09 Hz, 1 H), 3.39 (s, 3 H), 3.89 (s, 3 H), 4.02 (m, 1 H), 4.19 (d, J=9.29 Hz, 1 H), 4.31-4.47 (m, 2 H), 4.57 (s, 1 H), 5.17 (d, J=10.27 Hz, 1 H), 5.31 (d, J=16.63 Hz, 1 H), 5.73-5.90 (m, 2 H), 6.56 (d, J=9.29 Hz, 1 H), 7.04 (d, J=8.56 Hz, 1 H), 7.15 (d, J=1.96 Hz, 1 H), 7.22 (d, J=5.87 Hz, 1 H), 7.24-7.40 (m, 5 H), 7.86 (d, J=5.87 Hz, 1 H), 8.03 (d, J=9.05 Hz, 1 H). LC-MS (retention time: 3.017 min.), MS m/z 779 (MH+).
Example 26 Preparation of Compound 21
Figure imgf000094_0001
Compound 21 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. In the case of Compound 21 however, the acylsulfamide, employed was synthesized using methylisopropylamine in place of methylethylamine, and 6-methoxy-l-chloroisoquinoline was used in place of 2- phenyl-4-chloro-7-methoxyquinoline. LC-MS (retention time: 2.963 min.), MS m/z 768 (M+Na+).
Example 27 Preparation of Compound 22
Figure imgf000094_0002
Compound 22 was prepared by the route shown in Scheme 2 of Example 19 and as described for Compound 14 of Example 19. hi the case of Compound 22 however, the acylsulfamide employed was synthesized using methylisopropylamine in place of methylethylamine, and 1-chloroisoquinoline was used in place of 2-phenyl-4-chloro- 7-methoxyquinolin LC-MS (retention time: 2.993 min.), MS m/z 737 (M+Na ).
Example 28
Compound 23
Figure imgf000095_0001
Compound 23 can be prepared by synthesis methods such as described herein.
Example 29 Biological Studies
Recombinant HCV NS3/4A protease complex FRET peptide assay
The purpose of this in vitro assay was to measure the inhibition of HCV NS3 protease complexes, derived from the BMS strain, H77 strain or J416S strain, as described below, by compounds of the present invention. This assay provides an indication of how effective compounds of the present invention would be in inhibiting HCV proteolytic activity.
Serum from an HCV-infected patient was obtained from Dr. T. Wright, San
Francisco Hospital. An engineered full-length cDNA (compliment deoxyribonucleic acid) template of the HCV genome (BMS strain) was constructed from DNA fragments obtained by reverse transcription-PCR (RT-PCR) of serum RNA (ribonucleic acid) and using primers selected on the basis of homology between other genotype la strains. From the determination of the entire genome sequence, a genotype la was assigned to the HCV isolate according to the classification of
Simmonds et al. (See P Simmonds, KA Rose, S Graham, SW Chan, F McOmish, BC Dow, EA Follett, PL Yap and H Marsden, J. Clin. MicrobioL, 31(6), 1493-1503 (1993)). The amino acid sequence of the nonstructural region, NS2-5B, was shown to be >97% identical to HCV genotype la (H77) and 87% identical to genotype lb (J4L6S). The infectious clones, H77 (la genotype) and J4L6S (lb genotype) were obtained from R. Purcell (NIH) and the sequences are published in Genbank (AAB67036, see Yanagi,M., PurcelLR.H., Emerson,S.U. and Bukh,J. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 94(16),8738-8743 (1997); AF054247, see YanagLM, St Claire,M., Shapiro,M., Emerson,S.U., Purcell,R.H. and Bukh,J, Virology 244 (1), 161-172. (1998)).
The H77 and J4L6S strains were used for production of recombinant NS3/4A protease complexes. DNA encoding the recombinant HCV NS3/4A protease complex (amino acids 1027 to 1711) for these strains were manipulated as described by P. Gallinari et al. (see Gallinari P, Paolini C, Brennan D, Nardi C, Steinkuhler C, De Francesco R. Biochemistry. 38(17):5620-32, (1999)). Briefly, a three-lysine solubilizing tail was added at the 3'-end of the NS4A coding region. The cysteine in the PI position of the NS4A-NS4B cleavage site (amino acid 1711) was changed to a glycine to avoid the proteolytic cleavage of the lysine tag. Furthermore, a cysteine to serine mutation was introduced by PCR at amino acid position 1454 to prevent the autolytic cleavage in the NS3 helicase domain. The variant DNA fragment was cloned in the pET21b bacterial expression vector (Novagen) and the NS3/4A complex was expressed in Escherichia. coli strain BL21 (DE3) (Invitrogen) following the protocol described by P. Gallinari et al. (see Gallinari P, Brennan D, Nardi C, Brunetti M, Tomei L, Steinkuhler C, De Francesco R., J Virol. 72(8):6758- 69 (1998)) with modifications. Briefly, the NS3/4A protease complex expression was induced with 0.5 millimolar (mM) Isopropyl β-D-1-thiogalactopyranoside (IPTG) for 22 hours (h) at 20°C. A typical fermentation (1 Liter (L)) yielded approximately 10 grams (g) of wet cell paste. The cells were resuspended in lysis buffer (10 mL/g) consisting of 25 mM N-(2-Hydroxyethyl)Piperazine-N'-(2 -Ethane Sulfonic acid) (HEPES), pH 7.5, 20% glycerol, 500 mM Sodium Chloride (NaCl), 0.5% Triton X- 100, 1 microgram/milliliter ("μg/mL") lysozyme, 5 mM Magnesium Chloride (MgCl2), 1 μg/ml Dnasel, 5mM β-Mercaptoethanol (βME), Protease inhibitor - Ethylenediamine Tetraacetic acid (EDTA) free (Roche), homogenized and incubated for 20 minutes (min) at 4°C. The homogenate was sonicated and clarified by ultra-centrifugation at 235000 g for 1 h at 4°C. Imidazole was added to the supernatant to a final concentration of 15 mM and the pH adjusted to 8.0. The crude protein extract was loaded on a Nickel - Nifrilotriacetic acid (Ni-NTA) column pre- equilibrated with buffer B (25 mM HEPES, pH 8.0, 20% glycerol, 500 mM NaCl, 0.5% Triton X-100, 15 mM imidazole, 5 mM βME). The sample was loaded at a flow rate of 1 mL/min. The column was washed with 15 column volumes of buffer C (same as buffer B except with 0.2% Triton X-100). The protein was eluted with 5 column volumes of buffer D (same as buffer C except with 200 mM Imidazole).
NS3/4A protease complex-containing fractions were pooled and loaded on a desalting column Superdex-S200 pre-equilibrated with buffer D (25mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 20% glycerol, 300 mM NaCl, 0.2% Triton X-100, 10 mM βME). Sample was loaded at a flow rate of 1 mL/min. NS3/4A protease complex-containing fractions were pooled and concentrated to approximately 0.5 mg/ml. The purity of the NS3/4A protease complexes, derived from the BMS, H77 and J4L6S strains, were judged to be greater than 90% by SDS-PAGE and mass spectrometry analyses.
The enzyme was stored at -80°C, thawed on ice and diluted prior to use in assay buffer. The substrate used for the NS3/4A protease assay was RET SI (Resonance Energy Transfer Depsipeptide Substrate; AnaSpec, Inc. cat # 22991)(FRET peptide), described by Taliani et al. in Anal. Biochem. 240(2):60-67 (1996). The sequence of this peptide is loosely based on the NS4A/NS4B natural cleavage site for the HCV NS3 protease except there is an ester linkage rather than an amide bond at the cleavage site. The peptide substrate was incubated with one of the three recombinant NS3/4A protease complexes, in the absence or presence of a compound of the present invention, and the formation of fluorescent reaction product was followed in real time using a Cytofluor Series 4000.
The reagents were as follow: HEPES and Glycerol (Ultrapure) were obtained from GIBCO-BRL. Dimethyl Sulfoxide (DMSO) was obtained from Sigma, β- Mercaptoethanol was obtained from Bio Rad.
Assay buffer: 50 mM HEPES, pH 7.5; 0.15 M NaCl; 0.1% Triton; 15% Glycerol; 10 mM βME. Substrate: 2 μM final concentration (from a 2 mM stock solution in DMSO stored at -20°C). HCV NS3/4A protease type la (lb), 2-3 nM final concentration (from a 5 μM stock solution in 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 20% glycerol, 300 mM NaCl, 0.2% Triton-XlOO, 10 mM βME). For compounds with potencies approaching the assay limit, the assay was made more sensitive by adding 50 μg/ml Bovine Serum Albumin (Sigma) to the assay buffer and reducing the end protease concentration to 300 pM.
The assay was performed in a 96-well polystyrene black plate from Falcon. Each well contained 25 μl NS3/4A protease complex in assay buffer, 50 μl of a compound of the present invention in 10% DMSO/assay buffer and 25 μl substrate in assay buffer. A control (no compound) was also prepared on the same assay plate. The enzyme complex was mixed with compound or control solution for 1 min before initiating the enzymatic reaction by the addition of substrate. The assay plate was read immediately using the Cytofluor Series 4000 (Perspective Biosystems). The instrument was set to read an emission of 340 nm and excitation of 490 nm at 25 °C. Reactions were generally followed for approximately 15 min.
The percent inhibition was calculated with the following equation:
100 - [(δFM/δFco„)xl00]
where δF is the change in fluorescence over the linear range of the curve. A nonlinear curve fit was applied to the inhibition-concentration data, and the 50% effective concentration (IC50) was calculated by the use of Excel Xl-fit software using the equation, y=A+((B-A)/(l+((C/x)AD))).
All of the compounds tested were found to inhibit the activity of the NS3/4A protease complex with IC50's of 1.2 μM or less. Further, compounds of the present invention, which were tested against more than one type of NS3/4A complex, were found to have similar inhibitory properties though the compounds uniformly demonstrated greater potency against the lb strains as compared to the la strains.
Specificity Assays The specificity assays were performed to demonstrate the in vitro selectivity of the compounds of the present invention in inhibiting HCV NS3/4A protease complex as compared to other serine or cysteine proteases.
The specificities of compounds of the present invention were determined against a variety of serine proteases: human neutrophil elastase (HNE), porcine pancreatic elastase (PPE) and human pancreatic ch}*motr psin and one cysteine protease: human liver cathepsin B. In all cases a 96-well plate format protocol using colorimetric p-nitroaniline (pNA) substrate specific for each enzyme was used as described previously (PCT Patent Application No. WO 00/09543) with some modifications to the serine protease assays. All enzymes were purchased from Sigma while the substrates were from Bachem.
Each assay included a 2 h enzyme-inhibitor pre-incubation at room temperature followed by addition of substrate and hydrolysis to ~30% conversion as measured on a Spectramax Pro microplate reader. Compound concentrations varied " from 1.00 to 0.4 μM depending on their potency.
The final conditions for each assay were as follows:
50 mM Tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane hydrochloride (Tris-HCl) pH 8,
0.5 M Sodium Sulfate (Na2SO4), 50 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM EDTA, 3% DMSO, 0.01% Tween-20 with: 133 μM succ-AAA-pNA and 20 nM HNE or 8 nM PPE; 100 μM succ-AAPF- pNA and 250 pM Chymotrypsin.
100 mM NaHPO4 (Sodium Hydrogen Phosphate) pH 6, 0.1 mM EDTA, 3% DMSO, 1 mM TCEP (Tris(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine hydrochloride), 0.01% Tween-20, 30 μM Z-FR-pNA and 5 nM Cathepsin B (enzyme stock activated in buffer containing 20 mM TCEP before use).
The percentage of inhibition was calculated using the formula:
[l-((UVinll-UVblank)/(UVctl-UVblank))] x 100
A non-linear curve fit was applied to the inhibition-concentration data, and the 50% effective concentration (IC50) was calculated by the use of Excel Xl-fit software.
HCV Replicon Cell-based Assay
An HCV replicon whole cell system was established as described by Lobmann V, Korner F, Koch J, Herian U, Theifmann L, Bartenschlager R., Science 285(5424): 110-3 (1999). This system enabled us to evaluate the effects of our HCV Protease compounds on HCV RNA replication. Briefly, using the HCV strain lb sequence described in the Lohmann paper (Assession number: AJ238799), an HCV cDNA was generated encoding the 5' internal ribosome entry site (IRES), the neomycin resistance gene, the EMCV (encephalomyocarditis viurs)-IRES and the HCV nonstractural proteins, NS3-NS5B, and 3' non-translated region (NTR). In vitro transcripts of the cDNA were transfected into the human hepatoma cell line, Hulι7. Selection for cells constitutively expressing the HCV replicon was achieved in the presence of the selectable marker, neomycin (G418). Resulting cell lines were characterized for positive and negative strand RNA production and protein production over time.
Huh7 cells, constitutively expressing the HCV replicon, were grown in Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Media (DMEM) containing 10% Fetal calf serum (FCS) and 1 mg/ml G418 (Gibco-BRL). Cells were seeded the night before (1.5 x 104 cells/well) in 96-well tissue-culture sterile plates. Compound and no compound controls were prepared in DMEM containing 4% FCS, 1 : 100 Penicillin / Streptomysin, 1:100 L-glutamine and 5% DMSO in the dilution plate (0.5% DMSO final concentration in the assay). Compound / DMSO mixes were added to the cells and incubated for 4 days at 37°C. After 4 days, plates were rinsed thoroughly with Phosphate-Buffered Saline (PBS) (3 times 150 μl). The cells were lysed with 25 μl of a lysis assay reagent containing the FRET peptide (RET SI, as described for the in vitro enzyme assay). The lysis assay reagent was made from 5X cell Luciferase cell culture lysis reagent (Promega #E153A) diluted to IX with distilled water, NaCl added to 150 mM final, the FRET peptide diluted to 10 μM final from a 2 mM stock in 100% DMSO. The plate was then placed into the Cytofluor 4000 instrument which had been set to 340 nm excitation / 490 nm emission, automatic mode for 21 cycles and the plate read in a kinetic mode. EC50 determinations were carried out as described for the IC50 determinations.
Two different secondary assays were used to confirm EC50 determinations from the replicon FRET assay. These included a quantitative RNA assay and a transient luciferase cell reporter assay. For the quantitative RNA assay, compound / no compound controls were incubated with the cells as described for the replicon FRET assay. After 4 days, cells were lyzed using the Rneasy kit (Qiagen). Purified total RNA was normalized using RiboGreen (Jones LJ, Yue ST, Cheung CY, Singer VL, Anal. Chem., 265(2):368-74 (1998)) and relative quantitation of HCV RNA expression assessed using the Taqman procedure (Kolykhalov AA, Mihalik K, Feinstone SM, Rice CM, Journal of Virology 74, 2046-2051 (2000)) and the
Platinum Quantitative RT-PCR Thermoscript One-Step kit (Invitrogen cat # 11731- 015). Briefly, RNA made to a volume of 5 μl (< 1 ng) was added to a 20 μl Ready- Mix containing the following: 1.25X Thermoscript reaction mix (containing Magnesium Sulfate and 2-deoxynucleoside 5'-triphosρhates (dNTPs)), 3 mM dNTPs, 200 nM forward primer (sequence: 5'-gggagagccatagtggtctgc-3'), 600 nM reverse primer (5'-cccaaatctccaggcattga-3'), 100 nM probe (5'-6-FAM- cggaattgccaggacgaccgg-BHQ-l-3')(FAM: Fluorescein-aminohexyl amidite; BHQ: Black Hole Quencher), 1 μM Rox reference dye (Invitrogen cat # 12223-012) and Thermoscript Plus Platinum Taq polymerase mixture. All primers were designed with ABI Prism 7700 software and obtained from Biosearch Technologies, Novato, CA. Samples containing known concentrations of HCV RNA transcript were run as standards. Using the following cycling protocol (50°C, 30 min; 95°C, 5 min; 40 cycles of 95°C, 15 seconds (s), 60°C, 1 min), HCV RNA expression was quantitated as described in the Perkin Elmer manual using the ABI Prism 7700 Sequence Detector.
The luciferase reporter assay was also used to confirm compound potency in the replicon. Utilization of a replicon luciferase reporter assay was first described by Krieger et al (Krieger N, Lohmann V, and Bartenschlager R, J. Virol. 75(10)4614- 4624 (2001)). The replicon construct described for our FRET assay was modified by replacing the resistance gene neomycin with the Blasticidin-resistance gene fused to the N-terminus of the humanized form of Renilla luciferase (restriction sites Ascl / Pmel used for the subcloning). The adaptive mutation at position 1179 (serine to isoleucine) was also introduced (Blight KJ, Kolykhalov, AA, Rice, CM, Science 290(5498): 1972-1974). The luciferase reporter assay was set up by seeding huh7 cells the night before at a density of 2 x 10^ cells per T75 flask. Cells were washed the next day with 7.5 ml Opti-MEM. Following the invitrogen protocol, 40 μl DMRIE-C was vortexed with 5 ml Opti-MEM before adding 5 μg HCV reporter replicon RNA. The mix was added to the washed huh7 cells and left for 4 h at 37°C. In the mean time, serial compound dilutions and no compound controls were prepared in DMEM containing 10% FCS and 5% DMSO in the dilution plate (0.5% DMSO final concentration in the assay). Compound / DMSO mixes were added to each well of a 24- well plate. After 4 h, the transfection mix was aspirated, and cells washed with 5 ml of Opti-MEM before trypsinization. Trypsinized cells were resuspended in 10% DMEM and seeded at 2 x 104 cells/well in the 24- well plates containing compound or no compound controls. Plates were incubated for 4 days. After 4 days, media was removed and cells washed with PBS. 100 μl lx Renilla Luciferase Lysis Buffer (Promega) was immediately added to each well and the plates either frozen at -80°C for later analysis, or assayed after 15 min of lysis. Lysate (40 μl) from each well was transferred to a 96-well black plate (clear bottom) followed by 200 μl lx Renilla Luciferase assay substrate. Plates were read immediately on a Packard TopCount NXT using a luminescence program.
The percentage inhibition was calculated using the formula below:
% control = average luciferase signal in experimental wells (+ compound) average luciferase signal in DMSO control wells (- compound)
The values were graphed and analyzed using XLFit to obtain the EC50 value.
Biological Examples
Representative compounds of the invention were assessed in the HCV replicon cell assay described above and/or in several of the outlined specificity assays described above. For example, Compound 9 was found to have an IC50 of 128 nM against the BMS strain of the NS3/4A protease complex in the enzyme assay described above. Similar potency values were obtained with the published H77 (IC50 of 62 nM) and J4L6S (IC 0 of 41 nM) strains. The EC50 value in the replicon assay was 403 nM. In the specificity assays, Compound 9 was found to have the following activity: HNE = 46 μM; PPE > 200 μM; Chymotrypsin > 200 μM; Cathepsin B > 50 μM (assay interference at higher concentrations). These results indicate this family of compounds are highly specific for the NS3 protease and have utility for inhibiting HCV replicon replication.
The compounds inhibited below were tested for biological activity according to the HCV replican cell assay described above and were found to have activities set forth in Table 2 below. The activity ranges were classified into the following groups: for IC50, and EC50, A (least active) >1.5 μM; B 0.15-1.5 μM; C (most active) < 0.15 μM. Preferably, the IC50 values are from about 0.001-1 μM, and most preferably less than 0.1 μM. Preferably, the EC50 values are from about 0.001 to 25 μM, more preferably from about 0.001-1 μM and most preferably less than about 0.1 μM.
Figure imgf000104_0001
Although the invention has been described with respect to specific aspects, those skilled in the art will recognize that other aspects are intended to be included within the scope of the claims which follow. Further, the disclosures of documents referenced herein, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 6,323,180 and U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 20020111313, are incorporated herein, in their entirety, by reference.

Claims

A compound having the formula
Figure imgf000106_0001
wherein:
(a) Ri and R2 are each independently C1-8 alkyl, C3- cycloalkyl C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C6-10 aryl, C -14 alkylaryl, C9-14 cycloalkylaryl, C -14 alkoxyaryl, C9-14 cycloalkoxyaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C7-14 alkylheteroaryl; or R\ and R2, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 4-8 membered monocyclic heterocycle; (b) m is 1 or 2;
(c) n is 1 or 2;
(d) R3 is H; or C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl or C3- cycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with halogen;
(e) R4 is C1-8 alkyl optionally substituted with halo, cyano, amino, C1-6 dialkylamino, C6-ι0 aryl, C .14 alkylaryl, C1-6 alkoxy, carboxy, hydroxy, aryloxy, C7-14 alkylaryloxy, C -6 alkylester or C8-15 alkylarylester; C -1 alkenyl; C3- cycloalkyl or C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, wherein the cycloalkyl or alkylcycloalkyl are optionally substituted with hydroxy, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl or C1-6 alkoxy; or R3 together with the carbon atom to which it is attached forms a C3- cycloalkyl group optionally substituted with C2,6 alkenyl; (f) Y is H, phenyl substituted with nitro, pyridyl substituted with nitro, or Ci-6 alkyl optionally substituted with cyano, hydroxyl or C3-7 cycloalkyl; provided that if R5 or Re is H then Y is H;
(g) B is H, C1-6 alkyl, R5-(C=O>, R5O(C=O)-, R5-N(R6)-C(=O)-, R5-N(R6)-C(=S)-, R5SO2-, or R5-N(R6)-SO2-;
(h) R5 is (i) .io alkyl optionally substituted with phenyl, carboxyl, C1-6 alkanoyl, 1-3 halogen, hydroxy, -OC(O)C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, amino optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amido; (ii) C3- cycloalkyl, C3- cycloalkoxy, or C4-1o alkylcycloalklyl, each optionally substituted with hydroxy, carboxyl, (Ci-6 alkoxy)carbonyl, amino optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, amido, or (lower alkyl) amido; (iii) C6-1o aryl or C7-16 arylalkyl, each optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl, halogen, nitro, hydroxy, amido, (lower alkyl) amido, or amino optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl; (iv) Het; (v) bicyclo(l .1. l)pentane; or (vi) -C(O)OC1-6 alkyl, C2-6alkenyl or C2-6 alkynyl; (i) R6 is H; C1-6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 halogens; or Cj-6 alkoxy provided R5 is C1-10 alkyl; 0) X is O, S, SO, SO2, OCH2, CH2O or NH; (k) R' is Het, C6-10 aryl or C -1 alkylaryl, each optionally substituted with
Ra; and (1) Ra is Ci-6 alkyl, C3. cycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C3- cycloalkoxy, halo-Ci- β alkyl, CF3, mono-or di- halo-Cι-6 alkoxy, cyano, halo, thioalkyl, hydroxy, alkanoyl, NO , SH, , amino, C1-6 alkylamino, di (Ci-6) alkylamino, di (Cι-6) alkylamide, carboxyl, (Ci-6) carboxyester, C1-6 alkylsulfone, C1-6 alkylsulfonamide, di (Ci-6) alkyl(alkoxy)amine, C6- 10 aryl, C7-14 alkylaryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof.
2. The compound of claim 1 wherein Ri and R2 are each independently C1-8 alkyl, C3- cycloalkyl, C4.10 alkylcycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C6-10 aryl, C7-14 alkylaryl, 5- 7 membered heteroaryl or C7-1 alkylheteroaryl; or Ri and R2, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 4-8 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
3. The compound of claim 2 wherein Ri and R are each independently Cι-8 alkyl, C4-1o alkylcycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C6-10 aryl, C -14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C -14 alkylheteroaryl, or Ri and R2, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 5-6 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
4. The compound of Claim 1 wherein R3 is C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl or C3- cycloalkyl.
5. The compound of Claim 4 wherein R3 is C2-6 alkenyl.
6. The compound of Claim 1 wherein R4 is C1-8 alkyl optionally substituted with
C6 aryl, C1-6 alkoxy, carboxy, hydroxy, aryloxy, C -14 alkylaryloxy, C2-6 alkylester or C8-15 alkylarylester; C3-ι2 alkenyl; C3- cycloalkyl; or C -ιo alkylcycloalkyl.
7. The compound of Claim 6 wherein R4 is C1-8 alkyl optionally substituted with C1-6 alkoxy; or C3-7 cycloalkyl.
8. The compound of Claim 1 wherein Y is H.
9. The compound of Claim 1 wherein B is H, C1-6 alkyl, R5-(C=O)-, R5O(C=O)-, R5-N(R6)-C(=O)-, R5-N(R6)-C(=S)-, R5SO2-, or R5-N(R6)-SO2-.
10. The compound of Claim 9 wherein B is R5-(C=O)-, R5O(C=O)-, or R5-N(R6)-C(=O)-.
11. The compound of Claim 10 wherein B is R5O(C=O)- and R5 is Ci-6 alkyl.
12. The compound of Claim 1 wherein R5 is (i) Ci_io alkyl optionally substituted with phenyl, carboxyl, C1-6 alkanoyl, 1-3 halogen, hydroxy, C1-6 alkoxy; (ii) C3-7 cycloalkyl, C3- cycloalkoxy, or C4-ι0 alkylcycloalklyl; or (iii) C6-ι0 aryl or C _ι6 arylalkyl, each optionally substituted with C1-6 alkyl or halogen.
13. The compound of Claim 12 wherein R5 is (i) Ci-io alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 halogen or C1-6 alkoxy; or (ii) C3-7 cycloalkyl or C4.40 alkylcycloalkyl.
14. The compound of Claim 1 wherein R6 is H or C1-6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 halogens.
15. The compound of Claim 14 wherein R6 is H.
16. The compound of Claim 1 wherein X is O or NH.
17. The compound of Claim 1 wherein R' is Het; or C6-10 aryl optionally substituted with Ra.
18. The compound of Claim 17 wherein R' is Het.
19. The compound of Claim 18 wherein the heterocycle contains 1 or 2 nitrogen atoms and optionally a sulfur atom or an oxygen atom in the ring. '
20. The compound of Claim 19 wherein the heterocycle is substituted with at least one of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, halo, C6-10 aryl, C -14 alkylaryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
21. The compound of Claim 1 wherein Ra is C1-6 alkyl, C - cycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, halo-C β alkyl, halo, amino, C6 aryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
22. A compound having the formula
Figure imgf000110_0001
wherein:
(a) Ri and R2 are each independently C1-8 alkyl, C3- cycloalkyl, C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C6-10 aryl, C -14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or C .14 alkylheteroaryl; or Ri and R2, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 4-8 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
(b) m is 1 or 2; (c) n is 1 or 2;
(d) R3 is Cι-6 alkyl, C -6 alkenyl or C3-7 cycloalkyl;
(e) R4 is C1-8 alkyl optionally substituted with C aryl, C1-6 alkoxy,
( carboxy, hydroxy, aryloxy, C7-14 alkylaryloxy, C2-6 alkylester, C8-15 alkylarylester; C3-12 alkenyl; C3-7 cycloalkyl; or C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl; (f) B is H, C1-6 alkyl, R5-(C=O)-, R5O(C=O)-, R5-N(R6)-C(=O)-,
R5-N(R6)-C(=S)-, R5SO2-, or R5-N(R6)-SO2-; (g) R5 is (i) C1-10 alkyl optionally substituted with phenyl, carboxyl, Cι-6 alkanoyl, 1-3 halogen, hydroxy, Ci-6 alkoxy; (ii) C3-7 cycloalkyl, C -7 cycloalkoxy, or C4,10 alkylcycloalklyl; or (iii) C6-10 aryl or C7.ι6 arylalkyl, each optionally substituted with Cι-6 alkyl or halogen;
(h) R6 is H or C1-6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 halogens; (i) X is O or NH;
(j) R' is Het; or C6-1o aryl optionally substituted with Ra; and (k) Ra is Ci-6 alkyl, C3- cycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, halo-Ci-6 alkyl, halo, amino, C6 aryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof.
23. The compound of claim 22 wherein Ri and R2 are each independently C1-8 alkyl, C4-10 alkylcycloalkyl, Cι-6 alkoxy, C6-ιo aryl, C -14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl, C -14 alkylheteroaryl; or Ri and R2, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 5-6 membered monocyclic heterocycle
24. The compound of claim 23 wherein Ri and R2 are each independently C1-3 alkyl or C1-3 alkoxy.
25. The compound of Claim 22 wherein R' is a bicyclic heterocycle.
26. The compound of Claim 25 wherein the heterocycle contains 1 or 2 nitrogen atoms and optionally a sulfur atom or an oxygen atom in the ring.
27. The compound of Claim 25 wherein the heterocycle is substituted with at least one of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, halo, C6 aryl and a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
28. The compound of Claim 22 wherein R' is a bicyclic heterocycle containing 1 nitrogen atom and substituted with methoxy and at least one of a C6 aryl and a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
29. The compound of Claim 22 wherein R' is a monocyclic heterocycle.
30. The compound of Claim 29 wherein the heterocycle contains 1 or 2 nitrogen atoms and optionally a sulfur atom or an oxygen atom in the ring.
31. The compound of Claim 29 wherein the heterocycle is substituted with at least one of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, halo, C6-10 aryl, C -14 alkylaryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
32. The compound of Claim 22 wherein R' is a monoyclic heterocycle contaming 1 or 2 nitrogen atoms and substituted with methoxy and at least one of a C6 aryl and a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
33. A compound having the formula
Figure imgf000112_0001
wherein:
(a) Ri and R2 are each independently C1-8 alkyl, C4-1o alkylcycloalkyl,
Ci-6 alkoxy, C6-1o aryl, C -14 alkylaryl, 5-7 membered heteroaryl or
C- -u alkylheteroaryl; or Ri and R , together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, join to form a 5-6 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
( ) m is 1 or 2; (c) n is 1 or 2;
(d) R3 is C2-6 alkenyl;
(e) R4 is C1-8 alkyl; (i) B is R5O(C=O)-, or R5-NH-C(=O)-; (g) R5 is Cι-10 alkyl; (h) R' is a bicyclic heterocycle optionally substituted with Ra; and (0 Ra is Ci-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, halo, C6 aryl, or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof.
34. The compound of claim 33 wherein Ri and R are each independently Cι-3 alkyl or C1-3 alkoxy.
35. The compound of claim 34 wherein Ri is methyl.
36. The compound of claim 34 wherein R2 is methyl or methoxy.
37. The compound of Claim 33 wherein R3 is vinyl.
38. The compound of Claim 33 wherein R4 is t-butyl.
39. The compound of Claim 33 wherein R is t-butyl.
40. The compound of Claim 33 wherein R' is quinoline or isoquinoline optionally substituted with Ra.
41. The compound of Claim 31 wherein Ri is methyl, R2 is methoxy, R3 is vinyl, R4 is t-butyl, R is t-butyl, and R' is isoquinoline substituted with at least one Ra.
42. The compound of Claim 41 wherein Ra is C1-6 alkoxy.
43. The compound of Claim 42 wherein Ra further includes at least one of C6 aryl or a 5-7 membered monocyclic heterocycle.
44. A composition comprising the compound of Claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
45. The composition according to Claim 44 further comprising another compound having anti-HCV activity.
46. The composition according to Claim 45 wherein the other compound having anti-HCV activity is an interferon.
47. The composition according to Claim 46 wherein the interferon is selected from the group consisting of interferon alpha 2B, pegylated interferon alpha, consensus interferon, interferon alpha 2A and lymphoblastiod interferon tau.
48. The composition according to Claim 45 wherein the other compound having anti-HCV activity is selected from the group consisting of interleukin 2, mterleukin 6, interleukin 12, a compound that enhances the development of a type 1 helper T cell response, interfering RNA, anti-sense RNA, Imiqimod, ribavirin, an inosine 5'- monophospate dehydrogenase inhibitor, amantadine, and rimantadine.
49. The composition according to the Claim 44 further comprising an interferon and ribavirin.
50. The composition according to Claim 45 wherein the compound having anti- HCV activity is a small molecule compound.
51. The composition according to Claim 50 wherein the compound having anti- HCV activity is effective to inhibit the functioning of a target selected from the group consisting of HCV metalloprotease, HCV serine protease, HCV polymerase, HCV helicase, HCV NS4B protein, HCV entry, HCV assembly, HCV egress, HCV NS5A protein, IMPDH and a nucleoside of HCV.
52. A method of inhibiting the functioning of the HCV serine protease comprising contacting the protease with the compound of Claim 1.
53. A method of treating an HCV infection in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of Claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, prodrug or salt thereof.
54. The method according to Claim 53 wherein the compound is effective to inhibit the functioning of the HCV serine protease.
55. The method according to Claim 53 further comprising administering another compound having anti-HCV activity prior to, after or simultaneously with the compound of Claim 1.
56. The method according to Claim 55 wherein the other compound having anti- HCV activity is an interferon.
57. The method according to Claim 56 wherein the interferon is selected from the group consisting of interferon alpha 2B, pegylated interferon alpha, consensus interferon, interferon alpha 2A, lymphoblastiod interferon tau.
58. The method according to Claim 55 wherein the other compound having anti- HCV activity is selected from the group consisting of interleukin 2, interleukin 6, interleukin 12, a compound that enhances the development of a type 1 helper T cell response, interfering RNA, anti-sense RNA, Imiqimod, ribavirin, an inosine 5'- monophospate dehydrogenase inhibitor, amantadine, and rimantadine.
59. The method according to Claim 55 wherein the other compound having anti- HCV activity is a small molecule.
60. The method according to Claim 59 wherein the compound having anti-HCV activity is effective to inhibit the functioning of a target selected from the group consisting of HCV metalloprotease, HCV serine protease, HCV polymerase, HCV helicase, HCV NS4B protein, HCV entry, HCV assembly, HCV egress, HCV NS5 A protein, IMPDH and a nucleoside of HCV.
61. The method according to Claim 59 wherein the other compound having anti- HCV activity is effective to inhibit the functioning of target in the HCV life cycle other than HCV serine protease.
62. Use of the compound of Claim 1 for the manufacture of a medicament for treating HCV infection in a patient.
63. Use of the composition of Claim 44 for the manufacture of a medicament for treating HCV infection in a patient.
PCT/US2004/038165 2003-11-12 2004-11-12 Hepatitis c virus inhibitors WO2005046712A1 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP04811049A EP1687018B1 (en) 2003-11-12 2004-11-12 Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
JP2006539980A JP4675331B2 (en) 2003-11-12 2004-11-12 Hepatitis C virus inhibitor
ES04811049T ES2380934T3 (en) 2003-11-12 2004-11-12 Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
AT04811049T ATE542826T1 (en) 2003-11-12 2004-11-12 HEPATITIS C VIRUS INHIBITORS
IS8448A IS8448A (en) 2003-11-12 2006-05-10 Hepatitis C virus inhibition
NO20062267A NO20062267L (en) 2003-11-12 2006-05-19 Hepatitis C virus inhibitors

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US51912403P 2003-11-12 2003-11-12
US60/519,124 2003-11-12

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2005046712A1 true WO2005046712A1 (en) 2005-05-26

Family

ID=34590359

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2004/038165 WO2005046712A1 (en) 2003-11-12 2004-11-12 Hepatitis c virus inhibitors

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (1) US7132504B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1687018B1 (en)
JP (1) JP4675331B2 (en)
AT (1) ATE542826T1 (en)
ES (1) ES2380934T3 (en)
IS (1) IS8448A (en)
NO (1) NO20062267L (en)
WO (1) WO2005046712A1 (en)

Cited By (91)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006000085A1 (en) * 2004-06-28 2006-01-05 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis c inhibitor peptide analogs
US7132504B2 (en) 2003-11-12 2006-11-07 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7135462B2 (en) 2003-11-20 2006-11-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
EP1730167A1 (en) * 2004-01-21 2006-12-13 Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis c virus
WO2007019674A1 (en) 2005-08-12 2007-02-22 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
WO2007009109A3 (en) * 2005-07-14 2007-06-07 Gilead Sciences Inc Antiviral compounds
US7309708B2 (en) 2003-11-20 2007-12-18 Birstol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7323447B2 (en) 2005-02-08 2008-01-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7449479B2 (en) 2002-05-20 2008-11-11 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
WO2009005677A2 (en) * 2007-06-29 2009-01-08 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
JP2009501732A (en) * 2005-07-20 2009-01-22 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム インターナショナル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Hepatitis C inhibitor peptide analog
WO2009076173A2 (en) 2007-12-05 2009-06-18 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fluorinated tripeptide hcv serine protease inhibitors
WO2009076747A1 (en) 2007-12-19 2009-06-25 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
US7592336B2 (en) 2005-05-10 2009-09-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7601686B2 (en) 2005-07-11 2009-10-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
CN101583372A (en) * 2006-10-24 2009-11-18 默克公司 HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US7696242B2 (en) 2004-07-20 2010-04-13 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis C inhibitor peptide analogs
US7741281B2 (en) 2005-11-03 2010-06-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
WO2010080389A1 (en) 2008-12-19 2010-07-15 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Hcv ns3 protease inhibitors
WO2010080874A1 (en) 2009-01-07 2010-07-15 Scynexis, Inc. Cyclosporine derivative for use in the treatment of hcv and hiv infection
US7763584B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2010-07-27 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7767660B2 (en) 2006-12-20 2010-08-03 Istituto Di Richerche Di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti Spa Antiviral indoles
US7767818B2 (en) 2004-07-20 2010-08-03 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis C inhibitor dipeptide analogs
US7772180B2 (en) 2006-11-09 2010-08-10 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7772183B2 (en) 2005-10-12 2010-08-10 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7781422B2 (en) 2006-12-20 2010-08-24 Istituto Di Ricerche Di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti Spa Antiviral indoles
US7816348B2 (en) 2006-02-03 2010-10-19 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
WO2010132163A1 (en) 2009-05-13 2010-11-18 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic compounds as hepatitis c virus inhibitors
US7879797B2 (en) 2005-05-02 2011-02-01 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
WO2011014487A1 (en) 2009-07-30 2011-02-03 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Hepatitis c virus ns3 protease inhibitors
US7888464B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2011-02-15 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7897622B2 (en) 2006-08-17 2011-03-01 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
US7906619B2 (en) 2006-07-13 2011-03-15 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptides as inhibitors of viral replication
US7935670B2 (en) 2006-07-11 2011-05-03 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7939667B2 (en) 2003-05-21 2011-05-10 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis C inhibitor compounds
US7964560B2 (en) 2008-05-29 2011-06-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7973040B2 (en) 2008-07-22 2011-07-05 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Macrocyclic quinoxaline compounds as HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US7989438B2 (en) 2007-07-17 2011-08-02 Istituto Di Ricerche Di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti Spa Therapeutic compounds
US8003604B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2011-08-23 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
EP2364984A1 (en) 2005-08-26 2011-09-14 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of serine proteases
US8044087B2 (en) 2008-09-29 2011-10-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8044023B2 (en) 2008-05-29 2011-10-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
EP2399575A2 (en) 2006-08-11 2011-12-28 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Methods, uses and compositions for treatment of an infection by a virus of the family of flaviviridae through the farnesoid X receptor (FXR) inhibition
US8101595B2 (en) 2006-12-20 2012-01-24 Istituto di Ricerche di Biologia Molecolare P. Angletti SpA Antiviral indoles
US8138164B2 (en) 2006-10-24 2012-03-20 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8163921B2 (en) 2008-04-16 2012-04-24 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8163693B2 (en) 2007-09-24 2012-04-24 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Urea-containing peptides as inhibitors of viral replication
US8178520B2 (en) 2006-05-15 2012-05-15 Istituto Di Ricerche Di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti Spa Macrocyclic compounds as antiviral agents
US8178491B2 (en) 2007-06-29 2012-05-15 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
US8202996B2 (en) 2007-12-21 2012-06-19 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Crystalline forms of N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-3-methyl-L-valyl-(4R)-4-((7-chloro-4-methoxy-1-isoquinolinyl)oxy)-N- ((1R,2S)-1-((cyclopropylsulfonyl)carbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropyl)-L-prolinamide
US8207341B2 (en) 2008-09-04 2012-06-26 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process or synthesizing substituted isoquinolines
US8232246B2 (en) 2009-06-30 2012-07-31 Abbott Laboratories Anti-viral compounds
US8242140B2 (en) 2007-08-03 2012-08-14 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
WO2012107589A1 (en) 2011-02-11 2012-08-16 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Methods and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment and prevention of hcv infections
US8278322B2 (en) 2005-08-01 2012-10-02 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8283310B2 (en) 2008-12-15 2012-10-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8314062B2 (en) 2006-06-23 2012-11-20 Instituto Di Ricerche Di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti S.P.A. Macrocyclic compounds as antiviral agents
US8314141B2 (en) 1996-10-18 2012-11-20 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of serine proteases, particularly hepatitis C virus NS3 protease
US8343477B2 (en) 2006-11-01 2013-01-01 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Inhibitors of hepatitis C virus
US8377874B2 (en) 2006-10-27 2013-02-19 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8377873B2 (en) 2006-10-24 2013-02-19 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8420596B2 (en) 2008-09-11 2013-04-16 Abbott Laboratories Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US8435984B2 (en) 2007-02-26 2013-05-07 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tertiary amine substituted peptides useful as inhibitors of HCV replication
WO2013074386A2 (en) 2011-11-15 2013-05-23 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Hcv ns3 protease inhibitors
US8461107B2 (en) 2008-04-28 2013-06-11 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8563505B2 (en) 2008-09-29 2013-10-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8614180B2 (en) 2008-12-10 2013-12-24 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptides as inhibitors of viral replication
US8691757B2 (en) 2011-06-15 2014-04-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8927569B2 (en) 2007-07-19 2015-01-06 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Macrocyclic compounds as antiviral agents
US8937041B2 (en) 2010-12-30 2015-01-20 Abbvie, Inc. Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US8951964B2 (en) 2010-12-30 2015-02-10 Abbvie Inc. Phenanthridine macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US8957203B2 (en) 2011-05-05 2015-02-17 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8993595B2 (en) 2009-04-08 2015-03-31 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors
US9006423B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-04-14 Achillion Pharmaceuticals Inc. Process for making a 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptide cyclic analogue, an inhibitor of viral replication, and intermediates thereof
US9085607B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-07-21 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. ACH-0142684 sodium salt polymorph, composition including the same, and method of manufacture thereof
US9115175B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2015-08-25 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Processes for Producing sovaprevir
US9227952B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-01-05 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Sovaprevir polymorphs and methods of manufacture thereof
US9284307B2 (en) 2009-08-05 2016-03-15 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors
US9333204B2 (en) 2014-01-03 2016-05-10 Abbvie Inc. Solid antiviral dosage forms
US9334279B2 (en) 2012-11-02 2016-05-10 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
EP3020723A1 (en) 2010-09-21 2016-05-18 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic proline derived hcv serine protease inhibitors
US9353100B2 (en) 2011-02-10 2016-05-31 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, and their use for treating HCV infections
US9409943B2 (en) 2012-11-05 2016-08-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9457080B2 (en) 2005-06-08 2016-10-04 Emory University Methods and compositions for the treatment of persistent infections and cancer by inhibiting the programmed cell death 1 (PD-1) pathway
US9499550B2 (en) 2012-10-19 2016-11-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9580463B2 (en) 2013-03-07 2017-02-28 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9598491B2 (en) 2008-11-28 2017-03-21 Emory University Methods for the treatment of infections and tumors
US9598433B2 (en) 2012-11-02 2017-03-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9643999B2 (en) 2012-11-02 2017-05-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9738661B2 (en) 2006-10-27 2017-08-22 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US10201584B1 (en) 2011-05-17 2019-02-12 Abbvie Inc. Compositions and methods for treating HCV

Families Citing this family (48)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
SV2003000617A (en) 2000-08-31 2003-01-13 Lilly Co Eli INHIBITORS OF PROTEASA PEPTIDOMIMETICA REF. X-14912M
TWI359147B (en) 2003-09-05 2012-03-01 Vertex Pharma Inhibitors of serine proteases, particularly hcv n
US7491794B2 (en) * 2003-10-14 2009-02-17 Intermune, Inc. Macrocyclic compounds as inhibitors of viral replication
EP1804821A4 (en) 2004-10-01 2009-07-15 Vertex Pharma Hcv ns3-ns4a protease inhibition
MY141025A (en) 2004-10-29 2010-02-25 Vertex Pharma Dose forms
EP2305697A3 (en) * 2005-07-25 2011-07-27 Intermune, Inc. Macrocyclic inhibitors of Hepatitis C virus replication
US7964624B1 (en) 2005-08-26 2011-06-21 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of serine proteases
NZ568135A (en) 2005-10-11 2011-06-30 Array Biopharma Inc Macrocyclic compounds and methods for inhibiting hepatitis C viral replication
JP5436864B2 (en) 2006-02-27 2014-03-05 バーテックス ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Co-crystal containing VX-950 and pharmaceutical composition containing the same
CA2646229A1 (en) 2006-03-16 2007-09-27 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Deuterated hepatitis c protease inhibitors
US20080187516A1 (en) * 2006-06-06 2008-08-07 Ying Sun Acyclic oximyl hepatitis c protease inhibitors
US7728148B2 (en) * 2006-06-06 2010-06-01 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Acyclic oximyl hepatitis C protease inhibitors
UY30437A1 (en) * 2006-06-26 2008-01-31 Enanta Pharm Inc QUINOXALINIL MACROCECLIC INHIBITORS OF SERINE PROTEASE VIRUS OF HEPATITIS C
RU2008152171A (en) 2006-07-05 2010-08-10 Интермьюн, Инк. (Us) NEW HEPATITIS C VIRAL REPLICATION INHIBITORS
US20090035267A1 (en) * 2007-07-31 2009-02-05 Moore Joel D Acyclic, pyridazinone-derived hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US7635683B2 (en) * 2006-08-04 2009-12-22 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Quinoxalinyl tripeptide hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7687459B2 (en) * 2006-08-11 2010-03-30 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Arylalkoxyl hepatitis C virus protease inhibitors
US20080038225A1 (en) * 2006-08-11 2008-02-14 Ying Sun Triazolyl acyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
JP2010519329A (en) 2007-02-27 2010-06-03 バーテックス ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Serine protease inhibitor
JP2010519330A (en) 2007-02-27 2010-06-03 バーテックス ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Co-crystal and pharmaceutical composition containing the same
DK2144604T3 (en) 2007-02-28 2011-10-17 Conatus Pharmaceuticals Inc Methods for the treatment of chronic viral hepatitis C using RO 113-0830
US20080267917A1 (en) * 2007-04-26 2008-10-30 Deqiang Niu N-functionalized amides as hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
KR20100027134A (en) * 2007-05-10 2010-03-10 인터뮨, 인크. Novel peptide inhibitors of hepatitis c virus replication
US20090005387A1 (en) * 2007-06-26 2009-01-01 Deqiang Niu Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis c virus serine protease inhibitors
NZ583699A (en) * 2007-08-30 2012-04-27 Vertex Pharma Co-crystals of vx-950 (telaprevir) other components and pharmaceutical compositions comprising the same
WO2009070692A1 (en) * 2007-11-29 2009-06-04 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. C5-substituted, proline-derived, macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US8030307B2 (en) * 2007-11-29 2011-10-04 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bicyclic, C5-substituted proline derivatives as inhibitors of the hepatitis C virus NS3 protease
WO2009076166A2 (en) * 2007-12-05 2009-06-18 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oximyl hcv serine protease inhibitors
US8293705B2 (en) 2007-12-21 2012-10-23 Avila Therapeutics, Inc. HCV protease inhibitors and uses thereof
US8309685B2 (en) * 2007-12-21 2012-11-13 Celgene Avilomics Research, Inc. HCV protease inhibitors and uses thereof
AU2008340257B2 (en) * 2007-12-21 2015-06-11 Celgene Avilomics Research, Inc. HCV protease inhibitors and uses thereof
NZ586232A (en) 2007-12-21 2012-12-21 Avila Therapeutics Inc HCV protease inhibitors comprising a functionalised proline derivative
CN101980719A (en) * 2008-01-24 2011-02-23 益安药业 Heteroaryl-containing tripeptide HCV serine protease inhibitors
KR100945784B1 (en) 2008-01-24 2010-03-08 한국외국어대학교 연구산학협력단 The HCV treatment material inhibiting polymerase NS5B of HCV
CA2713005A1 (en) * 2008-01-24 2009-07-30 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Difluorinated tripeptides as hcv serine protease inhibitors
WO2009099596A2 (en) * 2008-02-04 2009-08-13 Idenix Pharamaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors
CA2719008A1 (en) * 2008-03-20 2009-09-24 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fluorinated macrocyclic compounds as hepatitis c virus inhibitors
AU2009249443A1 (en) 2008-04-15 2009-11-26 Intermune, Inc. Novel macrocyclic inhibitors of hepatitis C virus replication
WO2009134987A1 (en) * 2008-04-30 2009-11-05 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Difluoromethyl-containing macrocyclic compounds as hepatitis c virus inhibitors
WO2010093843A2 (en) 2009-02-12 2010-08-19 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Hcv combination therapies
AR075584A1 (en) 2009-02-27 2011-04-20 Intermune Inc THERAPEUTIC COMPOSITIONS THAT INCLUDE beta-D-2'-DESOXI-2'-FLUORO-2'-C-METHYLYCTIDINE AND A CARDIEX ISOINDOL ACID DERIVATIVE AND ITS USES. COMPOUND.
TW201119667A (en) * 2009-10-19 2011-06-16 Enanta Pharm Inc Bismacrocyclic compounds as hepatitis C virus inhibitors
KR20120139699A (en) 2010-01-29 2012-12-27 버텍스 파마슈티칼스 인코포레이티드 Therapies for treating hepatitis c virus infection
WO2011156545A1 (en) 2010-06-09 2011-12-15 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Viral dynamic model for hcv combination therapy
AR082215A1 (en) 2010-07-14 2012-11-21 Vertex Pharma PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION NICE TO THE PALATE
KR20130120481A (en) * 2010-10-08 2013-11-04 노파르티스 아게 Vitamin e formulations of sulfamide ns3 inhibitors
WO2012109646A1 (en) 2011-02-11 2012-08-16 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Treatment of hcv in hiv infection patients
WO2013116339A1 (en) 2012-01-31 2013-08-08 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated High potency formulations of vx-950

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6642204B2 (en) * 2002-02-01 2003-11-04 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis C inhibitor tri-peptides
US20040077551A1 (en) * 2002-05-20 2004-04-22 Campbell Jeffrey Allen Substituted cycloalkyl P1' hepatitis C virus inhibitors

Family Cites Families (40)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5610054A (en) 1992-05-14 1997-03-11 Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Enzymatic RNA molecule targeted against Hepatitis C virus
MY147327A (en) 1995-06-29 2012-11-30 Novartis Ag Somatostatin peptides
GB9517022D0 (en) 1995-08-19 1995-10-25 Glaxo Group Ltd Medicaments
US5633388A (en) 1996-03-29 1997-05-27 Viropharma Incorporated Compounds, compositions and methods for treatment of hepatitis C
EP0907659A1 (en) 1996-05-10 1999-04-14 Schering Corporation Synthetic inhibitors of hepatitis c virus ns3 protease
ES2169880T3 (en) 1996-10-18 2002-07-16 Vertex Pharma INHIBITORS OF SERINE PROTEASES, PARTICULARLY OF THE NS3 PROTEASE OF HEPATITIS VIRUS.
GB9623908D0 (en) 1996-11-18 1997-01-08 Hoffmann La Roche Amino acid derivatives
AU7127298A (en) 1997-04-14 1998-11-11 Emory University Serine protease inhibitors
GB9707659D0 (en) 1997-04-16 1997-06-04 Peptide Therapeutics Ltd Hepatitis C NS3 Protease inhibitors
IL134233A0 (en) 1997-08-11 2001-04-30 Boehringer Ingelheim Ca Ltd Hepatitis c inhibitor peptide analogues
EP1003775B1 (en) 1997-08-11 2005-03-16 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Hepatitis c inhibitor peptides
IT1299134B1 (en) 1998-02-02 2000-02-29 Angeletti P Ist Richerche Bio PROCEDURE FOR THE PRODUCTION OF PEPTIDES WITH PROTEAS INHIBITING THE NS3 PROTEASIS OF THE HCV VIRUS, PEPTIDES SO OBTAINABLE AND PEPTIDES
DK1066247T3 (en) 1998-03-31 2007-04-02 Vertex Pharma Inhibitors of serine proteases, especially hepatitis C virus NS3 protease
GB9812523D0 (en) 1998-06-10 1998-08-05 Angeletti P Ist Richerche Bio Peptide inhibitors of hepatitis c virus ns3 protease
ATE298317T1 (en) 1998-07-27 2005-07-15 Angeletti P Ist Richerche Bio DIKETO ACID DERIVATIVES AS INHIBITORS OF POLYMERASES
US6323180B1 (en) 1998-08-10 2001-11-27 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd Hepatitis C inhibitor tri-peptides
AR022061A1 (en) 1998-08-10 2002-09-04 Boehringer Ingelheim Ca Ltd INHIBITING PEPTIDES OF HEPATITIS C, A PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION CONTAINING THEM, THE USE OF THE SAME TO PREPARE A PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION, THE USE OF AN INTERMEDIATE PRODUCT FOR THE PREPARATION OF THESE PEPTIDES AND A PROCEDURE FOR THE PREPARATION OF ANOGRAPH .
EP1128832A4 (en) 1998-08-21 2003-03-05 Viropharma Inc Compounds, compositions and methods for treating or preventing viral infections and associated diseases
US6440985B1 (en) 1998-09-04 2002-08-27 Viropharma Incorporated Methods for treating viral infections
WO2000018231A1 (en) 1998-09-25 2000-04-06 Viropharma Incorporated Methods for treating or preventing viral infections and associated diseases
UA74546C2 (en) 1999-04-06 2006-01-16 Boehringer Ingelheim Ca Ltd Macrocyclic peptides having activity relative to hepatitis c virus, a pharmaceutical composition and use of the pharmaceutical composition
AU1262001A (en) 1999-11-04 2001-05-14 Biochem Pharma Inc. Method for the treatment or prevention of flaviviridae viral infection using nucleoside analogues
SK13752001A3 (en) 1999-12-27 2002-07-02 Japan Tobacco, Inc. Fused-ring compounds and use thereof as drugs
WO2001085172A1 (en) 2000-05-10 2001-11-15 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Novel anti-infectives
US6448281B1 (en) 2000-07-06 2002-09-10 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Viral polymerase inhibitors
GB0017676D0 (en) 2000-07-19 2000-09-06 Angeletti P Ist Richerche Bio Inhibitors of viral polymerase
AU2002248147B2 (en) * 2000-11-20 2006-04-06 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C tripeptide inhibitors
EP1469600B1 (en) * 2002-01-24 2007-06-27 Japan Science and Technology Agency Nonlinear resistor circuit using floating gate mosfets
CA2369711A1 (en) 2002-01-30 2003-07-30 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis c virus
CA2370396A1 (en) 2002-02-01 2003-08-01 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Hepatitis c inhibitor tri-peptides
CA2369970A1 (en) 2002-02-01 2003-08-01 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Hepatitis c inhibitor tri-peptides
US6828301B2 (en) 2002-02-07 2004-12-07 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pharmaceutical compositions for hepatitis C viral protease inhibitors
WO2004032827A2 (en) 2002-05-20 2004-04-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
MY140680A (en) 2002-05-20 2010-01-15 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
PL211889B1 (en) 2002-05-20 2012-07-31 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Heterocyclicsulfonamide hepatitis c virus inhibitors
WO2004101605A1 (en) * 2003-03-05 2004-11-25 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis c inhibiting compounds
WO2004094452A2 (en) * 2003-04-16 2004-11-04 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Macrocyclic isoquinoline peptide inhibitors of hepatitis c virus
CL2004001161A1 (en) * 2003-05-21 2005-04-08 Boehringer Ingelheim Int COMPOUNDS DESCRIBES COMPOUNDS DERIVED FROM QUINOLINA; PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION; AND ITS USE TO TREAT AN ILLNESS CAUSED BY THE HEPATITIS C VIRUS.
UY28525A1 (en) * 2003-09-22 2005-04-29 Boehringer Ingelheim Int ACTIVE MACROCICLIC PEPTIDES AGAINST HEPATITIS C VIRUSES
US7132504B2 (en) 2003-11-12 2006-11-07 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6642204B2 (en) * 2002-02-01 2003-11-04 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis C inhibitor tri-peptides
US20040077551A1 (en) * 2002-05-20 2004-04-22 Campbell Jeffrey Allen Substituted cycloalkyl P1' hepatitis C virus inhibitors

Cited By (135)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8314141B2 (en) 1996-10-18 2012-11-20 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of serine proteases, particularly hepatitis C virus NS3 protease
US8507722B2 (en) 2002-05-20 2013-08-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9636375B2 (en) 2002-05-20 2017-05-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8889871B2 (en) 2002-05-20 2014-11-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8710229B2 (en) 2002-05-20 2014-04-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7915291B2 (en) 2002-05-20 2011-03-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8299094B2 (en) 2002-05-20 2012-10-30 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7449479B2 (en) 2002-05-20 2008-11-11 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9227940B2 (en) 2002-05-20 2016-01-05 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7939667B2 (en) 2003-05-21 2011-05-10 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis C inhibitor compounds
US8067438B2 (en) 2003-05-21 2011-11-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis C inhibitor compounds
US7132504B2 (en) 2003-11-12 2006-11-07 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7309708B2 (en) 2003-11-20 2007-12-18 Birstol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7135462B2 (en) 2003-11-20 2006-11-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7749961B2 (en) 2004-01-21 2010-07-06 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis C virus
EP1730167A1 (en) * 2004-01-21 2006-12-13 Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis c virus
EP1730167A4 (en) * 2004-01-21 2008-04-09 Boehringer Ingelheim Int Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis c virus
JP2008504240A (en) * 2004-06-28 2008-02-14 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム インターナショナル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Hepatitis C inhibitor peptide analog
WO2006000085A1 (en) * 2004-06-28 2006-01-05 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis c inhibitor peptide analogs
JP4914348B2 (en) * 2004-06-28 2012-04-11 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム インターナショナル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Hepatitis C inhibitor peptide analog
US7705146B2 (en) 2004-06-28 2010-04-27 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis C inhibitor peptide analogs
US7696242B2 (en) 2004-07-20 2010-04-13 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis C inhibitor peptide analogs
US7767818B2 (en) 2004-07-20 2010-08-03 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis C inhibitor dipeptide analogs
US7323447B2 (en) 2005-02-08 2008-01-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7879797B2 (en) 2005-05-02 2011-02-01 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US7592336B2 (en) 2005-05-10 2009-09-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9457080B2 (en) 2005-06-08 2016-10-04 Emory University Methods and compositions for the treatment of persistent infections and cancer by inhibiting the programmed cell death 1 (PD-1) pathway
US11359013B2 (en) 2005-06-08 2022-06-14 Emory University Methods and compositions for the treatment of persistent infections and cancer by inhibiting the programmed cell death 1 (PD-1) pathway
US10370446B2 (en) 2005-06-08 2019-08-06 Emory University Methods and compositions for the treatment of persistent infections and cancer by inhibiting the programmed cell death 1 (PD-1) pathway
US7601686B2 (en) 2005-07-11 2009-10-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
WO2007009109A3 (en) * 2005-07-14 2007-06-07 Gilead Sciences Inc Antiviral compounds
JP2009501732A (en) * 2005-07-20 2009-01-22 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム インターナショナル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Hepatitis C inhibitor peptide analog
US8278322B2 (en) 2005-08-01 2012-10-02 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
WO2007019674A1 (en) 2005-08-12 2007-02-22 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
EP2364984A1 (en) 2005-08-26 2011-09-14 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of serine proteases
EP2366704A1 (en) 2005-08-26 2011-09-21 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of serine proteases
US7772183B2 (en) 2005-10-12 2010-08-10 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7741281B2 (en) 2005-11-03 2010-06-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7816348B2 (en) 2006-02-03 2010-10-19 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
US8178520B2 (en) 2006-05-15 2012-05-15 Istituto Di Ricerche Di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti Spa Macrocyclic compounds as antiviral agents
US8314062B2 (en) 2006-06-23 2012-11-20 Instituto Di Ricerche Di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti S.P.A. Macrocyclic compounds as antiviral agents
US7935670B2 (en) 2006-07-11 2011-05-03 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9610317B2 (en) 2006-07-13 2017-04-04 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptides as inhibitors of viral replication
US7906619B2 (en) 2006-07-13 2011-03-15 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptides as inhibitors of viral replication
US8785378B2 (en) 2006-07-13 2014-07-22 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic peptides as inhibitors of viral replication
US9233136B2 (en) 2006-07-13 2016-01-12 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptides as inhibitors of viral replication
EP2399988A2 (en) 2006-08-11 2011-12-28 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Cell culture system for replication of HCV through the farnesoid X receptor (FXR) activation or inhibition and diagnostic method for HCV infection
EP2399575A2 (en) 2006-08-11 2011-12-28 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Methods, uses and compositions for treatment of an infection by a virus of the family of flaviviridae through the farnesoid X receptor (FXR) inhibition
US7897622B2 (en) 2006-08-17 2011-03-01 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
US8309540B2 (en) 2006-10-24 2012-11-13 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
CN101583372A (en) * 2006-10-24 2009-11-18 默克公司 HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8377873B2 (en) 2006-10-24 2013-02-19 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8138164B2 (en) 2006-10-24 2012-03-20 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US9738661B2 (en) 2006-10-27 2017-08-22 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8377874B2 (en) 2006-10-27 2013-02-19 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8343477B2 (en) 2006-11-01 2013-01-01 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Inhibitors of hepatitis C virus
US7772180B2 (en) 2006-11-09 2010-08-10 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7888464B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2011-02-15 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8003604B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2011-08-23 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7763584B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2010-07-27 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7781422B2 (en) 2006-12-20 2010-08-24 Istituto Di Ricerche Di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti Spa Antiviral indoles
US8101595B2 (en) 2006-12-20 2012-01-24 Istituto di Ricerche di Biologia Molecolare P. Angletti SpA Antiviral indoles
US7767660B2 (en) 2006-12-20 2010-08-03 Istituto Di Richerche Di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti Spa Antiviral indoles
US8435984B2 (en) 2007-02-26 2013-05-07 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tertiary amine substituted peptides useful as inhibitors of HCV replication
US8178491B2 (en) 2007-06-29 2012-05-15 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
US8809267B2 (en) 2007-06-29 2014-08-19 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
US8809266B2 (en) 2007-06-29 2014-08-19 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
US8513186B2 (en) 2007-06-29 2013-08-20 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
WO2009005677A3 (en) * 2007-06-29 2009-03-05 Gilead Sciences Inc Antiviral compounds
WO2009005677A2 (en) * 2007-06-29 2009-01-08 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
US7989438B2 (en) 2007-07-17 2011-08-02 Istituto Di Ricerche Di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti Spa Therapeutic compounds
US8927569B2 (en) 2007-07-19 2015-01-06 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Macrocyclic compounds as antiviral agents
US8242140B2 (en) 2007-08-03 2012-08-14 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
US8163693B2 (en) 2007-09-24 2012-04-24 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Urea-containing peptides as inhibitors of viral replication
WO2009076173A2 (en) 2007-12-05 2009-06-18 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fluorinated tripeptide hcv serine protease inhibitors
EP2224942A4 (en) * 2007-12-05 2012-01-25 Enanta Pharm Inc Fluorinated tripeptide hcv serine protease inhibitors
EP2224942A2 (en) * 2007-12-05 2010-09-08 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fluorinated tripeptide hcv serine protease inhibitors
US8541402B2 (en) 2007-12-19 2013-09-24 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
WO2009076747A1 (en) 2007-12-19 2009-06-25 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
US8912182B2 (en) 2007-12-19 2014-12-16 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
US8476257B2 (en) 2007-12-19 2013-07-02 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
US8202996B2 (en) 2007-12-21 2012-06-19 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Crystalline forms of N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-3-methyl-L-valyl-(4R)-4-((7-chloro-4-methoxy-1-isoquinolinyl)oxy)-N- ((1R,2S)-1-((cyclopropylsulfonyl)carbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropyl)-L-prolinamide
US8338606B2 (en) 2007-12-21 2012-12-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Crystalline forms of N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-3-methyl-L-valyl-(4R)-4-((7-chloro-4-methoxy-1-isoquinolinyl)oxy)-N-((1R,2S)-1-((cyclopropylsulfonyl)carbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropyl)-L-prolinamide
US8163921B2 (en) 2008-04-16 2012-04-24 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8461107B2 (en) 2008-04-28 2013-06-11 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US7964560B2 (en) 2008-05-29 2011-06-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8044023B2 (en) 2008-05-29 2011-10-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7973040B2 (en) 2008-07-22 2011-07-05 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Macrocyclic quinoxaline compounds as HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8080654B2 (en) 2008-07-22 2011-12-20 Insituto di Ricerche di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti SpA Macrocyclic quinoxaline compounds as HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8877929B2 (en) 2008-09-04 2014-11-04 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process for synthesizing substituted isoquinolines
US8207341B2 (en) 2008-09-04 2012-06-26 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process or synthesizing substituted isoquinolines
US8357806B2 (en) 2008-09-04 2013-01-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process for synthesizing substituted isoquinolines
US8642538B2 (en) 2008-09-11 2014-02-04 Abbvie, Inc. Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US9309279B2 (en) 2008-09-11 2016-04-12 Abbvie Inc. Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US8420596B2 (en) 2008-09-11 2013-04-16 Abbott Laboratories Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US8563505B2 (en) 2008-09-29 2013-10-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8044087B2 (en) 2008-09-29 2011-10-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9598491B2 (en) 2008-11-28 2017-03-21 Emory University Methods for the treatment of infections and tumors
US9133115B2 (en) 2008-12-10 2015-09-15 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptides as inhibitors of viral replication
US8614180B2 (en) 2008-12-10 2013-12-24 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptides as inhibitors of viral replication
US8283310B2 (en) 2008-12-15 2012-10-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
WO2010080389A1 (en) 2008-12-19 2010-07-15 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Hcv ns3 protease inhibitors
WO2010080874A1 (en) 2009-01-07 2010-07-15 Scynexis, Inc. Cyclosporine derivative for use in the treatment of hcv and hiv infection
US8993595B2 (en) 2009-04-08 2015-03-31 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors
WO2010132163A1 (en) 2009-05-13 2010-11-18 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic compounds as hepatitis c virus inhibitors
US8232246B2 (en) 2009-06-30 2012-07-31 Abbott Laboratories Anti-viral compounds
US8828930B2 (en) 2009-07-30 2014-09-09 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Hepatitis C virus NS3 protease inhibitors
WO2011014487A1 (en) 2009-07-30 2011-02-03 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Hepatitis c virus ns3 protease inhibitors
US9284307B2 (en) 2009-08-05 2016-03-15 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors
EP3020723A1 (en) 2010-09-21 2016-05-18 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic proline derived hcv serine protease inhibitors
US8951964B2 (en) 2010-12-30 2015-02-10 Abbvie Inc. Phenanthridine macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US8937041B2 (en) 2010-12-30 2015-01-20 Abbvie, Inc. Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US9353100B2 (en) 2011-02-10 2016-05-31 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, and their use for treating HCV infections
WO2012107589A1 (en) 2011-02-11 2012-08-16 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Methods and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment and prevention of hcv infections
US8957203B2 (en) 2011-05-05 2015-02-17 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9527885B2 (en) 2011-05-05 2016-12-27 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US10201541B1 (en) 2011-05-17 2019-02-12 Abbvie Inc. Compositions and methods for treating HCV
US10201584B1 (en) 2011-05-17 2019-02-12 Abbvie Inc. Compositions and methods for treating HCV
US8691757B2 (en) 2011-06-15 2014-04-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
WO2013074386A2 (en) 2011-11-15 2013-05-23 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Hcv ns3 protease inhibitors
US9499550B2 (en) 2012-10-19 2016-11-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9643999B2 (en) 2012-11-02 2017-05-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9598433B2 (en) 2012-11-02 2017-03-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9334279B2 (en) 2012-11-02 2016-05-10 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9409943B2 (en) 2012-11-05 2016-08-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9580463B2 (en) 2013-03-07 2017-02-28 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US9115175B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2015-08-25 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Processes for Producing sovaprevir
US9481708B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-11-01 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Process for producing Sovaprevir
US9540346B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-01-10 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Sovaprevir polymorphs and methods of manufacture thereof
US9227952B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-01-05 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Sovaprevir polymorphs and methods of manufacture thereof
US9085607B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-07-21 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. ACH-0142684 sodium salt polymorph, composition including the same, and method of manufacture thereof
US9006423B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-04-14 Achillion Pharmaceuticals Inc. Process for making a 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptide cyclic analogue, an inhibitor of viral replication, and intermediates thereof
US10105365B2 (en) 2014-01-03 2018-10-23 Abbvie Inc. Solid antiviral dosage forms
US9744170B2 (en) 2014-01-03 2017-08-29 Abbvie Inc. Solid antiviral dosage forms
US9333204B2 (en) 2014-01-03 2016-05-10 Abbvie Inc. Solid antiviral dosage forms

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20050187165A1 (en) 2005-08-25
IS8448A (en) 2006-05-10
NO20062267L (en) 2006-08-04
EP1687018A4 (en) 2008-04-02
EP1687018B1 (en) 2012-01-25
JP2007534636A (en) 2007-11-29
EP1687018A1 (en) 2006-08-09
US7132504B2 (en) 2006-11-07
JP4675331B2 (en) 2011-04-20
ES2380934T3 (en) 2012-05-21
ATE542826T1 (en) 2012-02-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP1687018B1 (en) Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
EP1684745B1 (en) Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
EP1506000B1 (en) Heterocyclicsulfonamide hepatitis c virus inhibitors
JP4688815B2 (en) Hepatitis C virus inhibitor
US7041698B2 (en) Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US6878722B2 (en) Substituted cycloalkyl P1′ hepatitis C virus inhibitors
EP1951743B1 (en) Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
EP1904516A2 (en) Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
EP2049474A2 (en) Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
JP2010508362A (en) Hepatitis C virus inhibitor
JP2010508361A (en) Hepatitis C virus inhibitor

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2004811049

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2006539980

Country of ref document: JP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2004811049

Country of ref document: EP